JP2019208772A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine performing an appropriate notification corresponding to a variable display situation of specific identification information when a power interruption occurs.SOLUTION: If a presentation control CPU 120 receives a low probability/non-KT background designation command and a second no-customer demonstration display designation command, by specifying that the game state is in a low probability/non-KT state, a variable display of a first special symbol is being performed, and a variable display of a second special symbol is not being performed, characters of "Power Interruption Recovering" are to be displayed on the whole screen of an image display device 5. If the presentation control CPU 120 receives the low probability/non-KT background designation command and the first no-customer demonstration display designation command, by specifying that the game state is in the low probability/non-KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is not being performed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, characters of "Recovering" are to be displayed in the display range (upper right portion of a screen) of a second small symbol and a decorative symbol, a first small symbol, and a weather fine image are displayed in other portions.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-15

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  As such a gaming machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, when a power interruption occurs and the power supply is restored from the power interruption, the power supply is being restored based on the fact that the image control unit has received the power restoration designation command. There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a power restoration effect to notify the user.

JP-A-2006-187523 (FIG. 73)

  In the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, it is necessary to perform appropriate notification according to the variable display state of the specific identification information when the power interruption occurs when the power interruption is restored.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that performs appropriate notification according to the variable display status of specific identification information when power interruption occurs.

The gaming machine of means D1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Specific identification information variable display means capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel ( Game control means (main board 11) having a game control microcomputer 100);
Depending on the game state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Production control means (production control board 12) having decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols) corresponding to either one of Prepared,
The game control means (main board 11) is configured to display information corresponding to first information (first customer waiting demo display designation command, first special symbol) relating to variable display of first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Result designation command, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and second information regarding the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) (second customer waiting demo display designation command, second A display result designation command corresponding to a special symbol, a variation pattern command corresponding to a second special symbol, and gaming state information (low probability / non-KT background designation command, low probability / first KT background designation command, high probability) / First KT background designation command, high accuracy / second KT background designation command) can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control board 12),
When the production control means (production control board 12) recovers from a power interruption, it can execute a recovery notification in a different manner depending on the first information, the second information, and the gaming state information. Yes (as shown in “Situation 2” in FIG. 10-15, the gaming state is low / non-KT state based on the reception of the low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command. Since it is possible to specify that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is the main symbol is being executed and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is the sub symbol is not being executed. The characters “Restoring power off” are displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5, and as shown in “Situation 4” in FIG. Based on receiving The gaming state is in a low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the variation display of the first special symbol as the main symbol is not executed, and the variation display of the second special symbol as the sub symbol is executed. Therefore, the text “Recovering” is displayed in the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small symbol, which is a sub symbol, and the other design symbols (decorative symbols and (First small pattern) and background image (clear image) are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information in parallel, it is possible to perform appropriate notification regarding power-off recovery.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) In correspondence with variable display of specific identification information that does not correspond to), variable display of special identification information that is less visible than decoration identification information (variable display of the first small symbol, variable display of the second small symbol) can be executed A gaming machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, the player can confirm the status of variable display of the specific identification information by confirming the status of variable display of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the production control means (production control CPU 120) recovers from the power interruption,
The first information (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and the second information (second customer waiting demonstration display designation) Command, display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol), variable display of specific identification information corresponding to variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols) Information (for example, first customer waiting demo display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) is received. When there is not, execute the recovery notification of the first mode (the recovery screen shown in FIG. 10-16 (B) with the characters “currently recovering from power failure” displayed on the entire screen),
Among the first information and the second information, information related to variable display of specific identification information that does not correspond to variable display of decoration identification information (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) (second customer waiting demo display designation command, When the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol and the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol are not received, the recovery notification of the second mode (the sub symbol shown in FIG. 10-16 (A)) Is displayed in the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small symbol corresponding to, and in the other parts, each effect symbol (decorative symbol and first small symbol) and background image (clear image) ) Is displayed, and then information related to variable display of specific identification information that does not correspond to variable display of decoration identification information (second customer waiting demo display designation command, display result corresponding to second special symbol) Specified When the command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol) is received, the restoration notification of the second mode is terminated (the symbols for effect (decoration symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image) (Only clear images are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the recovery process is notified in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information and the variable display status of the specific identification information not corresponding to the decoration identification information. Is possible.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variable display result and the first reserved memory number is not 0) (Fluctuation display)
The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is generated) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the second special symbol). The second specific identification information (second special symbol) is variable based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the second and the second reserved memory number is not 0) Display (fluctuation display),
It can be controlled to a special state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state (big hit gaming state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, 2 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol normal processing. Based on the jackpot gaming state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B)),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when the special state (small hit gaming state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the advantageous state is controlled. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the state is controlled to the special state, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
A gaming machine of means D4,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, a gaming state different from the advantageous state can be realized as a gaming state advantageous for the player.

The gaming machine of means D6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D5,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable indication of the first special symbol) is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) The variable display of the second special identification information that is less visible than the information (decorative symbol) is executable (the variable display of the second small symbol can be performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). A gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by confirming the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means D7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D6,
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
When the variable display of decoration identification information (production control CPU 120) and the variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols) are not executed, special effects (first demonstration display, second demonstration display) are executed. An effect control unit (effect control board 12) having possible special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal process, neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Based on this, the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, and after the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs), the second start condition is (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the game is not controlled to either the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, and the second Pending memory count is Not) perform the variable display of the second specific identification information (second special symbol variable display) in particular on the basis,
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first starting condition (no starting prize has been generated in the winning ball device 6A) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol variation display is not executed, and the second start condition is not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (Second customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The said effect control part (effect control board 12) can perform a 1st special effect by the said special effect execution means according to being in a 1st game state, when the said 1st special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in -38, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the fact that the second game state is set (FIG. 9). As shown in -39, the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step 026IWS). YES at 801), based on a KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), starts the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a special effect can be started only when a command corresponding to the current gaming state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the gaming state. .

The gaming machine of means D8 is
A gaming machine of means D7,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol is displayed). The first special effect is terminated in response to the fact that neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) (see FIG. 9-38). As shown, when the first special symbol variation display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demonstration display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (FIGS. 9-39) As shown, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the execution status of variable display of specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means D9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D8,
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal process, neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Based on this, the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, and after the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs), the second start condition is (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the game is not controlled to either the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, and the second Pending memory count is Not) perform the variable display of the second specific identification information (second special symbol variable display) in particular on the basis,
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A is generated). The number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of one start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the first reserved memory number is 4, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. 1st hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be established (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the variable special display result of the second special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of the start prize to the winning ball device 6A) when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state The number of reserved memories can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved memories is 1, "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015)
During the execution of the special effect (second demonstration display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B is generated). The number of reserved storage corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the second reserved memory number is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 4 second hold indications 06TM020 can be displayed),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol variable display result). Corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B) when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled) Can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second number of stored pools is zero, “0” can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of reserved memories can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of reserved memories in the second aspect that is lower in visibility than the first aspect.

The gaming machine of means D10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D9,
Among the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable identification display of the specific identification information (first Different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable special result of the second special symbol is “small hit”) during the special symbol change display) Variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state);
An end effect accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state) (an effect executed in response to the reception of the small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4)). And an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect such as displaying characters and characters of “30 pt GET!” On the image display device 5 after closing the special variable winning ball device 17;
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state). Thus, after closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 that has been opened, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display apparatus 5 and the four displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 are displayed. In the second KT state, the small hitting ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state, while the execution period of the effect that erases the second hold display 06TM020 is short (see FIG. 10-11). (As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a non-special state, the period during which the variable display of one specific identification information is interrupted can be shortened, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific production information and one specific identification information. Inconsistency with performance can be suppressed.

  As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs a demonstration display (special effect) according to the execution state of variable display has been proposed. In addition, as shown in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), there is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time. Proposed. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086690 (FIG. 22) describes a gaming machine that can execute variable display of two specific identification information as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 (paragraph 0050). When the configuration for executing the described special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately perform the effect control related to the special effect. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and appropriately performs the effect control regarding the special effect in the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the two specific identification information in parallel. There is.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variable display result and the first reserved memory number is not 0) And the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process) The second specific identification information (second) is based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved memory number is not 0). Variable display of special symbols) Specific identification information variable display means capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. (Game controlling microcomputer 100);
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decoration symbols) corresponding to either one of the above,
Special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (first demonstration display, second demo display) when variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols) is not executed; Prepared,
During execution of the special effects (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), when the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied, any of the first start condition and the second start condition It is possible to end the special effect based on the establishment of either one (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the first special symbol variation display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), When the 1 demo display is finished (step 026IWS4716), and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as shown in FIG. 9-39 (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is finished (step 026IWS4816). ),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). In FIG. 10-4, the small special game state is controlled on the basis of the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A). As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol Regardless of whether one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied or not when the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the result of the fluctuation display (YES in step S06TM1000B) The special effect can be continued (as shown in FIG. 9-38, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and the small hit Since it is controlled to the skill state (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demonstration display does not end, and as shown in FIG. 9-39, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814). Since it is controlled to the small hit gaming state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demonstration display does not end)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the state of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative display of the decoration symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the second specific identification information (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) can be performed when controlled to the second gaming state (KT state). (Variable display) can be performed variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols),
When the first game condition (non-KT state) is controlled during execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition is set when the first start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is terminated in response to the establishment (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first special symbol). Is displayed (YES in step 026IWS4714), and the first demonstration display ends (step 026IWS4716). On the other hand, when the second start condition is satisfied, the special effect is continued (as shown in FIG. 9-38). In addition, when the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, but the variation display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714). Since jackpot uncontrolled gaming state (NO in step 026IWS4715), first demonstration display is not ended (step 026IWS4716)),
If the second game state (KT state) is controlled during execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied when the second start condition can be satisfied. In response to this, the special effect is ended (as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is generated, the variation display of the second special symbol is started (YES in Step 026IWS4814). On the other hand, the second demonstration display ends (step 026IWS4816). On the other hand, when the first start condition is satisfied, the special effect is continued (as shown in FIG. 9-39, the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A is generated). Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814) and is controlled to the KT state (step). YES in 026IWS4815), second demonstration display is not ended (step 026IWS4816)),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). In FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the small special game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A). When the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the special effect is continued regardless of whether or not the first start condition is satisfied (FIG. 9-38). As shown, since the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), it is controlled to the small hit gaming state (step 026IWS471). NO), the first demonstration display is not terminated, and as shown in FIG. 9-39, the second special symbol variation display is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and is controlled to the small hit gaming state. (The second demonstration display is not terminated) (YES in step 026IWS4815), so that the special effect is continued regardless of whether or not the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-38). When the start winning to the ball device 6B occurs, the first special symbol fluctuation display is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714) and is controlled to the small hit gaming state (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demonstration display Is not ended, and as shown in FIG. 9-39, the change display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814). Ri because it is controlled to the playing state (Step 026IWS4815 YES), does not terminate the second demonstration display)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the state of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
It can be controlled to a special state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state (big hit gaming state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, 2 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol normal processing. Based on the jackpot gaming state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B)),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when the special state (small hit gaming state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the advantageous state is controlled. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the state is controlled to the special state, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine of means A3,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, a gaming state different from the advantageous state can be realized as a gaming state advantageous for the player.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable indication of the first special symbol) is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) The variable display of the second special identification information that is less visible than the information (decorative symbol) is executable (the variable display of the second small symbol can be performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). A gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by confirming the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
An effect control unit (effect control board 12) having the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120);
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first starting condition (no starting prize has been generated in the winning ball device 6A) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol variation display is not executed, and the second start condition is not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (Second customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The said effect control part (effect control board 12) can perform a 1st special effect by the said special effect execution means according to being in a 1st game state, when the said 1st special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in -38, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the fact that the second game state is set (FIG. 9). As shown in -39, the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step 026IWS). YES at 801), based on a KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), starts the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a special effect can be started only when a command corresponding to the current gaming state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the gaming state. .

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine of means A6,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol is displayed). The first special effect is terminated in response to the fact that neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) (see FIG. 9-38). As shown, when the first special symbol variation display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demonstration display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (FIGS. 9-39) As shown, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the execution status of variable display of specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A is generated). The number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of one start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the first reserved memory number is 4, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. 1st hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be established (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the variable special display result of the second special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of the start prize to the winning ball device 6A) when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state The number of reserved memories can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved memories is 1, "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015)
During the execution of the special effect (second demonstration display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B is generated). The number of reserved storage corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the second reserved memory number is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 4 second hold indications 06TM020 can be displayed),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol variable display result). Corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B) when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled) Can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second number of stored pools is zero, “0” can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of reserved memories can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of reserved memories in the second aspect that is lower in visibility than the first aspect.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
Among the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable identification display of the specific identification information (first Different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable special result of the second special symbol is “small hit”) during the special symbol change display) Variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state);
An end effect accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state) (an effect executed in response to the reception of the small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4)). And an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect such as displaying characters and characters of “30 pt GET!” On the image display device 5 after closing the special variable winning ball device 17;
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state). Thus, after closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 that has been opened, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display apparatus 5 and the four displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 are displayed. In the second KT state, the small hitting ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state, while the execution period of the effect that erases the second hold display 06TM020 is short (see FIG. 10-11). (As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a non-special state, the period during which the variable display of one specific identification information is interrupted can be shortened, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific production information and one specific identification information. Inconsistency with performance can be suppressed.

  As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs a demonstration display (special effect) according to the execution state of variable display has been proposed. In addition, as shown in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), there is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time. Proposed. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086690 (FIG. 22) describes a gaming machine that can execute variable display of two specific identification information as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 (paragraph 0050). When the configuration for executing the described special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately perform the effect control related to the special effect. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B9 is made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and appropriately performs the effect control regarding the special effect in the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the two specific identification information in parallel. There is.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variable display result and the first reserved memory number is not 0) And the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process) The second specific identification information (second) is based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved memory number is not 0). Variable display of special symbols) Specific identification information variable display means capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. (Game controlling microcomputer 100);
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decoration symbols) corresponding to either one of the above,
Special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (first demonstration display, second demo display) when variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols) is not executed; Prepared,
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition are determined regardless of whether the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is terminated based on the fact that either one of the two start conditions is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-21, the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, and the first reserved memory number is 1. Then (NO in step S06TM1400), the first demonstration display is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs, and the second reserved memory number becomes 1 (step S06TM1500). NO) and end the second demo display)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control according to the establishment status of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative display of the decoration symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the second specific identification information (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) can be performed when controlled to the second gaming state (KT state). (Variable display) can be performed variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition or the second start condition can be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). Therefore, the game is not controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, and the first reserved memory number is not 0, or as shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process, when the game is not controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved memory number is not 0), the first start condition The special effect is ended in response to the establishment (start winning prize to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs) (as shown in FIGS. 10-21, when the starting winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, the first special symbol changes) Display starts (026IWS4714 YES), the first demonstration display is ended), and the special effect is ended in response to the establishment of the second start condition (as shown in FIG. 10-22, when the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs) , The variation display of the second special symbol is started (YES in 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is ended)
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition or the second start condition cannot be established (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process). Thus, the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, or, as shown in FIG. 10-4, the first special symbol is the big hit gaming state or small in the second special symbol normal processing. The special effect is terminated in response to the establishment of the first start condition (as shown in FIGS. 10-21), the start winning to the winning ball device 6A is generated. However, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), but the first reserved memory number becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1400, the first demonstration display is terminated), and the second start condition is satisfied. To establishment At this time, the special effect is ended (as shown in FIG. 10-22, even if the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814). The second reserved storage number becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1500), and the second demonstration display is terminated)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control according to the establishment status of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
It can be controlled to a special state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state (big hit gaming state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, 2 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol normal processing. Based on the jackpot gaming state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B)),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when the special state (small hit gaming state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the advantageous state is controlled. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the state is controlled to the special state, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B3,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, a gaming state different from the advantageous state can be realized as a gaming state advantageous for the player.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable indication of the first special symbol) is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) The variable display of the second special identification information that is less visible than the information (decorative symbol) is executable (the variable display of the second small symbol can be performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). A gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by confirming the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
An effect control unit (effect control board 12) having the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120);
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first starting condition (no starting prize has been generated in the winning ball device 6A) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol variation display is not executed, and the second start condition is not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (Second customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The said effect control part (effect control board 12) can perform a 1st special effect by the said special effect execution means according to being in a 1st game state, when the said 1st special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in -38, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the fact that the second game state is set (FIG. 9). As shown in -39, the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step 026IWS). YES at 801), based on a KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), starts the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a special effect can be started only when a command corresponding to the current gaming state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the gaming state. .

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol is displayed). The first special effect is terminated in response to the fact that neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) (see FIG. 9-38). As shown, when the first special symbol variation display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demonstration display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (FIGS. 9-39) As shown, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the execution status of variable display of specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B7,
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A is generated). The number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of one start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the first reserved memory number is 4, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. 1st hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be established (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the variable special display result of the second special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of the start prize to the winning ball device 6A) when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state The number of reserved memories can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved memories is 1, "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015)
During the execution of the special effect (second demonstration display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B is generated). The number of reserved storage corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the second reserved memory number is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 4 second hold indications 06TM020 can be displayed),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol variable display result). Corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B) when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled) Can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second number of stored pools is zero, “0” can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of reserved memories can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of reserved memories in the second aspect that is lower in visibility than the first aspect.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B8,
Among the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable identification display of the specific identification information (first Different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable special result of the second special symbol is “small hit”) during the special symbol change display) Variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state);
An end effect accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state) (an effect executed in response to the reception of the small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4)). And an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect such as displaying characters and characters of “30 pt GET!” On the image display device 5 after closing the special variable winning ball device 17;
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state). Thus, after closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 that has been opened, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display apparatus 5 and the four displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 are displayed. In the second KT state, the small hitting ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state, while the execution period of the effect that erases the second hold display 06TM020 is short (see FIG. 10-11). (As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a non-special state, the period during which the variable display of one specific identification information is interrupted can be shortened, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific production information and one specific identification information. Inconsistency with performance can be suppressed.

  As a gaming machine, as shown in JP2013-138737A (FIG. 65), two special symbols (specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time, while the decoration identification information corresponding to one special symbol is variably displayed, the other If the special symbol variable display result is a big hit, the special symbol corresponding to the decoration identification information is switched from one special symbol to the other special symbol, and the variable identification result corresponding to the other special symbol is displayed as a variable display result. A gaming machine that displays a jackpot symbol has been proposed. As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-138737 (FIG. 65), when variable display of two specific identification information is simultaneously performed, the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information is changed from one specific identification information to the other specific When a configuration that switches to the identification information is applied, it is unclear which display result of the decoration identification information corresponds to the display result of which specific identification information, and the player may misidentify the decoration identification information. It is necessary to perform appropriate control regarding the correspondence relationship between the specific identification information and the specific identification information. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C9 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that performs appropriate control regarding the correspondence between the decoration identification information and the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Specific identification information variable display means capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel ( A game controlling microcomputer 100);
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decoration symbols) corresponding to either one of the above,
Among the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) ) When controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to (), as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4), the first corresponding to the decorative symbol When the special symbol variation display result is “big hit”, the notification effect of notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4)) (In this example, “222”) is provided with a notification effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect).
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information not corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information When the above-described advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4)), the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol not corresponding to the decorative symbol is “big hit” The notification effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1)), and the character “FEVER” is displayed without executing the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative symbols that are the big hits. Displayed to report the occurrence of a big hit)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decoration identification information, based on the variable display of any specific identification information by not performing the notification effect. It is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying whether it is controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information The display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is “big hit” as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4). The movable body that can execute the movable body effect using the movable body (movable body operation effect that moves the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the standing position as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3)). Production execution means (production control CPU 120),
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information not corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information When the above-mentioned advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4)), the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is “big hit” The movable body effect is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the movable body operation effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the movable body effect is executed at an irregular timing unexpected by the player who is paying attention to the variable display of the decoration identification information. Prevents the decline in the body production interest.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variable display result and the first reserved memory number is not 0) (Fluctuation display)
The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is generated) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the second special symbol). The second specific identification information (second special symbol) is variable based on the fact that neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the second and the second reserved memory number is not 0) Display (fluctuation display),
It can be controlled to a special state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state (big hit gaming state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, 2 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. 10-4, the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol normal processing. Based on the jackpot gaming state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B)),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be established when the special state (small hit gaming state) is controlled (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variation display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state because the start condition cannot be satisfied when the advantageous state is controlled. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied when the state is controlled to the special state, the player can be concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine of means C3,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state).
According to such a configuration, a gaming state different from the advantageous state can be realized as a gaming state advantageous for the player.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable indication of the first special symbol) is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) The variable display of the second special identification information that is less visible than the information (decorative symbol) is executable (the variable display of the second small symbol can be performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). A gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by confirming the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A game control unit (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
When the variable display of decoration identification information (production control CPU 120) and the variable display of decoration identification information (decorative display of decorative symbols) are not executed, special effects (first demonstration display, second demonstration display) are executed. An effect control unit (effect control board 12) having possible special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal process, neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Based on this, the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, and after the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs), the second start condition is (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the game is not controlled to either the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, and the second Pending memory count is Not) perform the variable display of the second specific identification information (second special symbol variable display) in particular on the basis,
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first starting condition (no starting prize has been generated in the winning ball device 6A) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. The first special command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol variation display is not executed, and the second start condition is not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). And (second customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The said effect control part (effect control board 12) can perform a 1st special effect by the said special effect execution means according to being in a 1st game state, when the said 1st special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in -38, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702). 1 demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the fact that the second game state is set (FIG. 9). As shown in -39, the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step 026IWS). YES at 801), based on a KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), starts the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a special effect can be started only when a command corresponding to the current gaming state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the gaming state. .

The gaming machine of means C7 is
A gaming machine of means C6,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, a start condition corresponding to the first specific identification information (first special symbol) is established (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first In the special symbol normal processing, the first bonus memory state is not controlled and neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol and the first reserved memory number is not 0). The special effect is terminated (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the first special symbol variation display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4716)).
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, a start condition corresponding to the second specific identification information (second special symbol) is established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, the second In the special symbol normal process, the second bonus memory state is not controlled and neither the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is set to 0, and the second reserved memory number is not 0) The special effect is finished (as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the second special symbol variation display is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the execution status of variable display of specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C7,
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal process, neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol is controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Based on this, the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, and after the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs), the second start condition is (As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the game is not controlled to either the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, and the second Pending memory count is Not) perform the variable display of the second specific identification information (second special symbol variable display) in particular on the basis,
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the winning ball device 6A is generated). The number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of one start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the first reserved memory number is 4, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. 1st hold display 06TM010 can be displayed),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be established (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the variable special display result of the second special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition according to the establishment of the first start condition (occurrence of the start prize to the winning ball device 6A) when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state The number of reserved memories can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved memories is 1, "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015)
During the execution of the special effect (second demonstration display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B is generated). The number of reserved storage corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition can be displayed in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the second reserved memory number is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 4 second hold indications 06TM020 can be displayed),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol variable display result). Corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition according to the establishment of the second start condition (occurrence of a start prize to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B) when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled) Can be displayed in a second mode that is less visible than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the second number of stored pools is zero, “0” can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of reserved memories can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of reserved memories in the second aspect that is lower in visibility than the first aspect.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C8,
Among the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable identification display of the specific identification information (first Different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable special result of the second special symbol is “small hit”) during the special symbol change display) Variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when controlled to a special state (small hit game state);
An end effect accompanying the end of the special state (small hit game state) (an effect executed in response to the reception of the small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4)). And an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect such as displaying characters and characters of “30 pt GET!” On the image display device 5 after closing the special variable winning ball device 17;
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit gaming state). Thus, after closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 that has been opened, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display apparatus 5 and the four displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 are displayed. In the second KT state, the small hitting ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state, while the execution period of the effect that erases the second hold display 06TM020 is short (see FIG. 10-11). (As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a non-special state, the period during which the variable display of one specific identification information is interrupted can be shortened, and it corresponds to the variable display status of one specific production information and one specific identification information. Inconsistency with performance can be suppressed.

  As a gaming machine, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed, and the variable means is provided so that a game medium moving along a specific path among the movement paths can be entered, and a game to the specific path Some are configured to be able to execute specific notifications for promoting the firing of the medium. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044) describes that a second game state display unit is provided that lights when a big hit or a small hit occurs and notifies that it is right-handed. ing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044), there is no distinction between when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. A specific notification is being executed. For this reason, it is not always possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the game medium. Accordingly, an object of the invention according to the means E1 to the means E7 is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

(Means E1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a gaming medium (for example, a game ball) has entered the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the second identification based on the game medium having entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of information (for example, second special symbol) (for example, steps S110A to S113A and second special symbol of first special symbol process (step S25A) in game control microcomputer 100) A process process (step S25B) in which a process corresponding to steps S110A to S113A is executed) and a first state in which a game medium can enter (for example, an open state) And variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 17) that can change to a second state (for example, a closed state) in which entry of the game medium is difficult or impossible, and any of the first identification information and the second identification information After the variable display is executed, control is performed to either an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) or a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). Possible state control means (for example, processing corresponding to steps S115A to S121A of the first special symbol process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100 and steps S115A to S121A of the second special symbol process (step S25B)) And a variable means control means for controlling the variable means to the first state when the special state is being controlled. (For example, a part for executing processing corresponding to steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process (step S25A) and steps S119A to S121A of the second special symbol process (step S25B) in the gaming control microcomputer 100) The first start area is provided such that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) among the movement paths through which the game medium can move is provided, and the variable means includes a movement path Among them, a game medium moving on a specific route (for example, the right region of the game region) is provided so as to be able to enter, and a specific notification (for example, FIG. 9-48 (1 ), Specific notification execution means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the right-handed notification shown in (2). Step 026 A part for executing IWS2012A, S2021B, and S2027B. For example, the part which performs step 026IWS624, S634 in CPU120 for production control. And the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and is controlled to the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that Y in step 026IWS2024A For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the same process as step 026IWS 624 when the result is Y in step 026IWS629 (see FIG. 9-48 (3)). To do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

(Means E2) In the means 1, information relating to variable display of the first identification information, first hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to variable display of the first identification information, and information relating to variable display of the second identification information 2nd storage means (for example, 2nd storage memory buffer) which can be stored as reservation storage, the state control means is the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state), and the second identification information It can be controlled to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can perform steps 026IWS2208A, S2213A, SS14A, S2219A, S2220A, (S2208B, S2213B, SS14B, S2219B, S2220B are executed), and the variable display executing means executes one variable when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. Based on the derivation display of the special display result as the display result of the display, the specific display result and the predetermined display result (for example, the off symbol) different from the special display result are derived and displayed as the display result of the other variable display ( For example, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation frame. When receiving the de-and second force symbol determined designation command, performs control to determine display the failure symbol in step 026IWS9703) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be digested smoothly.

(Means E3) In the means 1 or 2, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, paying out 10 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to the special prize opening). , A value giving means (for example, payout control) that can give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, paying out 15 prize balls based on the winning of game balls to the big prize opening) The specific notification executing means includes a first specific notification (for example, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) as the specific notification. Lighting) and the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48 (1)), which is higher in visibility than the first specific notification, can be executed and controlled in an advantageous state. Sometimes, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2022A, S2021B, and S2022B, and the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS624 and S634. 9-48 (1)), when the special display is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 may execute steps 026IWS2027B and S2028B, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute step 026IWS634 (see FIG. 9-48 (2)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to an assignable value.

(Means E4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the state control means can be controlled to a plurality of special states (for example, small hits A to C), and variable display of the first identification information is executed. When the state is controlled to the special state after being changed, the special state of a kind that is less advantageous by a high ratio (for example, small size) than the case of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The specific notification executing means executes the specific notification when the second identification information is variably displayed and controlled to a special state (FIGS. 9-48 (2), (3)). ))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

(Means E5) In any one of the means 1 to means 4, variable display effect executing means capable of executing variable display effects (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to at least variable display of the first identification information ( For example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes a step S171 to S173), and the variable display effect executing means executes the variable display effect in a common mode when controlled to the special state and when not controlled to the special state. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS920 to S922, and if the first special symbol variation display is executed and the small hit is made, the non-reach off symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the recognizability to the player for the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed.

(Means E6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium upstream of the variable means in the specific route (for example, a restriction provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B) Piece). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time.

(Means E7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game control means Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) for controlling the production based on the information is provided, and the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed display 26) for performing predetermined notification. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2021B, and S2027B), the effect control means includes specific notification execution means, and the specific notification execution means is specified in response to notification by the notification means. Notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) is executed (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) Performing step 026IWS634 when Y in step 026IWS633) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of alerting | reporting when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st small hit | end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd small hit end process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of a game state transition. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of setting value suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of a right-handed alert | report. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the decorative design and small design corresponding to a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow when it is controlled by each game state. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production | presentation when starting winning a prize during the 1st demonstration display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each effect when starting winning a prize during the 1st demonstration display. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st small hit | end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd small hit end process. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when controlled to the small hit gaming state during the high probability / second KT state, and (B) is a small hit during the low probability / first KT state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production when it is controlled to a game state. (A1) to (A5) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of each effect when controlled to the small hit gaming state during the high probability / second KT state, and (B1) to (B4) are low probability. / It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each effect when it is controlled by the small hit game state in the 1st KT state. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is a big win, and (B) is a second special symbol not corresponding to the decorative symbol is a big hit. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect at the time. (A1)-(A4) is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each production when the 1st special symbol corresponding to a decoration symbol becomes a big hit, (B1)-(B4) does not respond | correspond to a decoration symbol It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each production when a 2nd special symbol becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the transmission command according to the condition at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows a power recovery timing and a power recovery recovery state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control when a power failure occurs in the low probability / non-KT state and power is restored. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control when a power failure occurs in the low probability / non-KT state and power is restored. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control at the time of power failure having occurred in the high accuracy / second KT state and power recovery. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each display control at the time of power failure having occurred in the high accuracy / second KT state and power recovery. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a demonstration display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a demonstration display control process. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production | presentation when starting winning a prize during the 1st demonstration display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of each production when a start prize is received during the 1st demonstration display.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  Also, a right-handed indicator 26 is provided below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B for urging a right-handed operation for performing a launch operation aiming at the right side of the game area. Yes. The right-handed display 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display for which execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  Further, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first start winning opening is provided. The game ball won in the first start winning opening is led to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Further, a nail row 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first start winning opening is provided. Has been. Thus, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the game balls that have flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, a shooting operation of the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed) Only when the operation is performed, the game ball can be won at the first start winning opening.

  In this example, the case where the game ball is configured to be awarded at the first start winning opening only when left-handed operation is performed by providing the nail row 19 is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the first start winning opening may be configured so that a game ball can be won at the first starting winning opening only when left-handed operation is performed because the first starting winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area. The game ball may be awarded to the first start winning opening only when the mouth is provided on the left side of the game area and the nail row 19 is also provided to make a left-handed operation.

  A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, by moving forward and backward in the front-rear direction. The game is changed between an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won in a grand prize opening located below the member. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the big hit gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state where the head is moved forward, the bottom member is moved backward and the opening control is performed to open the large winning opening serving as the winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second start winning port. As shown, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is disposed on the left side, and the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-like bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. By moving forward / backward, an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening and a second start winning opening located below the bottom member, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won (both in a closed state) Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 has the bottom member in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, the bottom member is moved backward to perform the opening control to open the special winning opening serving as the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening that becomes the winning area.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves from the upper left to the lower right and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B below the special variable winning ball device 7.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. The game balls on the winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B if the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are closed. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom ball member of the variable prize ball device 6B is moved backward and the second start prize opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second start prize slot and the special variable prize ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 and falls to the out opening as it is.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. Yes. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-rear direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case where there is no restriction piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B starts from the special variable winning ball device. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that.

  A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball won in the grand prize opening is provided in the big prize opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is in the open state, it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be closed and the grand prize opening is in a closed state, it is impossible for the player to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the big prize opening. It becomes disadvantageous.

  A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special prize opening is provided in the special prize opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) through another prize opening, such as the first start prize opening 1 or the second start prize opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is impossible for the player to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the special winning opening. It becomes disadvantageous.

  In addition, a second start port switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning port is provided in the second start winning port. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this pachinko machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so that in the big hit game or KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims to the right side of the game area (so-called right-handed operation) )I do.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game proceeds to the big hit gaming state based on the passing of the game ball through the pass gate 41, so that the pass gate 41 also serves as an operating area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of a normal starting area and an operating area.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect frame LED 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. .

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is a normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a launch operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming to the left of the game area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by a rotation operation on the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol display is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, a “hit” is obtained. . Further, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at a very low rate and may be “small hit”.

  After the display result in the first special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the upper open limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, there are multiple types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) Accordingly, the jackpot type is set accordingly. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state may be controlled according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  In the KT state, KT control is performed which tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, so that fewer prize balls are obtained compared to the big hit game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, control (short-time control) is performed (short-time control) that shortens the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) from the normal state (short-time state). The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also performed by improving the probability of The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is an advantageous state for the player.

  The probability variation state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions is satisfied first, such as a predetermined number of special game runs or the next big hit game state is started. To do. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut probability change or the like).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a jackpot gaming state advantageous for a player, a probability change state, a KT state, a high base state, or the like, and the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after power-on as in the case of a system reset). It is a state to be done.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a launch operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on the batting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on a jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “hit”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is set. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the second special game is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is in an open state in a predetermined opening mode. Similar to the big hit type, the “small hit” may be provided with the small hit type.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed).

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the point of the frame LED 9 Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. You may make it perform a pseudo-continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) And the like (a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and turned on) is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the prize winning door. The information is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating operation contents as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (signal for designating the sound to be output) in order to perform audio output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. An LED signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the LED) is supplied to the board 13 or the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and LED on / off.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED on / off control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power failure to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process for each timer interrupt, the execution and holding of the first special symbol game, the control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the control of the gaming state, etc. are realized. (Details will be described later). In addition, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process for each timer interrupt, the execution and holding of the second special symbol game, the control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the control of the gaming state, etc. are realized. The In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol in parallel.

  Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Although omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period for performing a right-handed operation. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game or during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control for outputting a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning at the first start winning opening, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Is done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the first reserved memory number, transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the first reserved memory number, and the prefetch determination on the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set thus transmitted is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process (steps S110A to S121A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” or “big hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In the first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated using random value values for variation pattern determination based on a predetermined determination result or the like as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing to determine either is included. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A, and an elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying are measured. Processing to be included. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the first special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol variation process is completed. To do.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol change process (step S112A) is shifted to the first special symbol change process. When the special symbol variation display is in progress, there is a case where the second special symbol variation display becomes a small hit and is controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit game). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-release process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process The value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process so that the value is not changed. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the second special symbol variation display, the first special symbol variation display is interrupted, and after the small hit game ends, the first special symbol variation display is resumed. You are in control. In addition, not only in such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the first special symbol started to change is interrupted (timer The update may be interrupted).

  Further, for example, the small hitting ending period as the small hitting end processing period may be varied depending on the gaming state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the interrupt period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the interrupt period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative design, and this will produce an uncomfortable feeling for the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hitting ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

  Also, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no particular effect is given, so the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. You may comprise. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and an effect that emphasizes the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than that in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

  Furthermore, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit release pre-processing period, the length of the period may be varied depending on the gaming state as in the small hit ending period.

  The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In the first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol. A process for setting is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “9”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

  The first gate passage wait process in step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is “4”. In this first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The first big hit release pre-processing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “5”. In the first big hit release pre-processing, based on the display result being “big hit”, etc., a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting for opening the big winning opening, etc. It is included. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “6”, and the first big hit release pre-processing is completed.

  The first big hit releasing process of step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “6”. This first big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. And a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the prize winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after the processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “7”. Then, the first big hit opening process is terminated.

  The first big hit release post-processing in step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “7”. This first post-hit after-opening process includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached a set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, A process for making a setting for ending the gaming state is included. When the number of round executions does not reach the upper limit execution number, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “6”, while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the first special figure process flag is updated. The value of the figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first big hit release post-processing ends.

  The first big hit end process in step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “8”. The first jackpot end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state is executed, or the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting probability variation control, KT control, and high base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the first big hit end processing is ended.

  The first small hit pre-release process in step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “9”. The pre-opening process for the first small hit includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be in an open state in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being “small hit”. . At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the first small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The first small hit releasing process in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “10”. In the first small hit opening process, a process for measuring an elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened, and a timing for returning the special winning opening from the opened state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. The process etc. which determine whether it became are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “11”, and the first small hit opening process ends.

  The first small hitting end process in step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “11”. The first small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the first small hit end processing ends.

  The process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described with reference to FIG. 5, if “first” is read as “second”, the second special symbol process is described. Each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process (step S25B) is stored as a hold information in a second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process and changes in the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, there may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, which may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is being performed (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit game). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-release process to the first small hit end process), and if it is during the small hit game, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process The value is not changed, and if the game is not in the small hit game, the value of the second special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation display is interrupted, and after the small hit game ends, the second special symbol variation display is resumed. You are in control. Not only such control but also, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the second special symbol started to change is interrupted (timer The update may be interrupted).

  In addition, regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be varied depending on the gaming state.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the frame LED 9 and the decoration LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various effect devices such as operation is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the LED control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being accommodated in the board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. Further, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuations of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling on / off / coloring of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to 100 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8C, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 8A is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8A) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. This is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each prize opening (large prize winning opening, second starting winning prize opening, first starting winning prize opening, first to fourth general winning prize openings, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”. The number of game balls entering (also referred to as) is counted, and various winning information such as run ratio and role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. That is, it is normal for the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to design the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening as frequently as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a substrate case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) to be described later is changed at the lower right side of the back of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. A game shop clerk or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 is predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk possessing a predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. The switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation. Possible switches may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that the key can be inserted / removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game shop clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used for discharging the gaming balls that have won the prize winning holes and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a released game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The discharge port switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and a decoration. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the LEDs for use are included.

  FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8B, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Also, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the gaming machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2 and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the door is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. (Error) is also determined. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer. 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect a clogged game ball, that is, a so-called ball bite. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball short switch 21TM187 indicates a full ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. The launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. The firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are placed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal by putting specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of the winning ball request signal, and the award for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the winning ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the winning ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It transmits to the microcomputer 100 for control. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls to be lapped through an output port 21TM372b to a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, but is not shown in FIG.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is not shown in FIG. 8-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

  In response to the player's operation, the card board 21TM050 receives a ball switch signal indicating that the ball switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending possible display signal are provided from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of rental balls. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to fall. Thereafter, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. It is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  8A to 8F are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of variable display, a determination value for jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, then the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”. ing. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the big probability is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, A big hit is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of “2”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/250) than the cases of “2” and “3”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than the cases of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is a variable display target.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F). Separately, jackpot determination is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value that can be set to may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 8-5 (1) shows an example in which a “sunny” ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows that a “cloudy” ending screen is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5 (3) shows an example in which an “ending” image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 8-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of setting suggestion based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to CPU 120 for effect control. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state is ended, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended (“BONUS end”). It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (a clear mode, a cloudy mode, a rain mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 8-5 (4), the setting value designated by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3,4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), when the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (2) is determined, and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 5 (3) is determined, the determination value is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the “sunny” mode setting indication shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute an effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a moderate rate (for example, 40%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 has a “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by changing the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player will be interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in a “sunny” manner. Expect to be.

(Power-on processing)
Next, power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are regular values, and six setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like. The setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the setting value 4 in this example. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from a gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether a setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode is changed to a setting changing mode described later (step S21TM4580) and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (game state initialization) is determined to be executed. When the value is 1, the RAM clear is determined to be executed. It has been shown. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected for the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When the detection signal indicating that this is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) and / or Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is selected? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

  In the present embodiment, in order to obtain a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the change of the setting value is not permitted, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2 ) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state are necessary. The CPU 103 can check the set value when it is confirmed that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070 (setting check) Mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). On the condition that this is done, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, as will be described later.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is inaccurate. The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode It is also possible not to control either of them.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is controlled without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send Setting Command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. In addition, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that a setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). And the process after step S21TM4510 relevant to the setting change mode shown to FIGS. 8-7 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON in step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message “Setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power supply is temporarily turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). To notify the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (to confirm the set value). For example, a message “Please turn on the power after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode” is displayed. Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is cut off.

  In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., so that “the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)”. Despite the possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all being judged as YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) has not been established and the transition to the setting change mode has not been made. Notification is made (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided corresponding to the gaming machine, or a calling lamp device). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the letter “E” is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms weight, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode has not been changed to the setting change mode.

  The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on, and when it is determined as YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to determine the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process described above (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is impossible to shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the store clerk or the like of the game hall must turn the pachinko gaming machine 1 off once and turn on the power again. Don't be. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily turned off, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Thus, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value change is not permitted but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state. Even if the two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO) The game is controlled to be in a game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 sets “0” having the lowest jackpot probability as the regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530) and then executes a power-off process (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 checks whether a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power outage is input. If a power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 Immediately before the operation cannot be performed due to the stop, the power supply stop process is executed. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed) When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power supply is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0-5) stored in the set value storage area. The game shop clerk normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, so if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the game shop clerk actually There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after completion of the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode), the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (the setting change mode here) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. For this reason, when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Each time the game shop clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the control is changed to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the previous power cut occurs) is 3. If there is a setting change, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 and the display monitor 21TM029 is updated accordingly. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the update of the setting value (step S21TM4620) are equivalent to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes in steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag) Is controlled to be 0).

  In addition, the current setting value display (step S21TM4550) and security signal output (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command transmission (step S21TM4590) and the setting value update (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). The RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. When the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state or not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the process after step S21TM4540 is repeated after waiting for 4 ms again (step S21TM4530). That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control in the setting confirmation mode is continued. If the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control in the setting change mode is continued.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process. Will be. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when the game signal reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, output of a security signal is started (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation are started. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed since the end of any control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In addition, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (determining which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In this way, security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

  Also, security signal output is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, a common value (1000 ms) is used for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both security signal output start control and output end control are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, any mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once set in step S21TM4710. After 1000 ms is set as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. Yes. In other words, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset to 30 sec (overwritten).

  When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the end of the setting check mode when the setting check mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 1 sec has elapsed, and when it is controlled in the setting change mode, 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interruption after the interruption is permitted. In processing (for example, information output processing), when the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1000 ms to 0 ms and controlled to the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after interrupt permission. The security signal output is continued until In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode or when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. The security signal output may be continued until 0 ms until the game control timer interruption process is completed after the security signal output ends.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the setting confirmation mode control is finished and when the setting change mode control is finished, and the setting change mode is controlled. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the setting change mode control is completed. With such a configuration, the security signal output period can be made different between the case where the setting check mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled while sharing the security signal output control.

  As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the initialization process has been executed and the setting check mode has been controlled, or whether the initialization process has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled. . For example, if the security signal output period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, the initial state It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that control processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  Note that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (which is cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. A security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

  Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, so the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized but remains set in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to limit the security signal output period to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is executed, so that the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (the occurrence of power failure occurs). As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode (according to the execution of the RAM clear). Period).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer to be set to suffices to be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power change occurs after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if the mode is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the set command (value stored in the set value storage area) is directly displayed on the effect control CPU 120 side as an image. If displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), An effect that suggests a set value is executed in a range.

  Not only in such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting value storage area in the setting command, and effects control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. Thereby, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command are displayed on the image display device 5 as they are, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be notified or suggested appropriately. Further, it is not necessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control burden on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Moreover, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step In step S21TM4020, it is determined that the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at the time of power-off recovery without clearing the RAM.

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt processing (special (Including design process processing). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 based on the value of the RAM clear flag. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and the process proceeds to normal game processing.

  Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 has recovered from the power-off based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed) )). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the frame LED 9, the recovery from the power interruption has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clear is not performed) can be notified.

  On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at power-on accompanied by RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing for setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer, and processing when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. The game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing and the like) may be performed after the interrupt is permitted.

  As illustrated in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, hold memory, etc.) is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is.

  The reason for not clearing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area in this RAM clearing process is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (B) When controlled to the setting change mode, the value in the setting value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or in the setting change mode. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear process, it is impossible to control the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the set value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like are flags that are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set.

  After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, a big hit determination in the special symbol process is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 performs the initialization process based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without performing the recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like have been initialized (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without being recovered from the power interruption.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. become. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The security signal timer value is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed. It remains.

  In step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, when the value of the security signal timer is set, a security signal is output in the game control timer interruption process after the interruption is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed with the permission of the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

  Then, CPU 103 executes setting processing of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. In addition, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). This shifts to a normal game process capable of executing a game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol stop symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process has been shifted to the power-off recovery process. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). It is also possible to shift to the processing at the time of power-off recovery.

  In this example, if the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process has shifted to the process at power-on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the gaming machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, a game clerk or the like turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (to execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state and the like. Can not be initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). As described above, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the setting value is unstable because it was controlled to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value to be determined on the game hall side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030) (step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output corresponding to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and when the power is turned on, It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when a disconnection occurred.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition (in step S21TM4030: YES) for shifting to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), a setting value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor is in a game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the letter “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, each of the seven-segment display devices 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed with the letter “E”, thereby causing the store clerk in the game hall to generate an abnormality (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off in the controlled state). The presentation control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command displays a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode", thereby playing the game hall. To change the set value by switching to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). Notification is made to prompt the user to confirm (set the set value).

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn the power on again after power off”) Please change to the setting change mode ").

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “Setting change mode is in progress” or a message “Please change the setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk of the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the set value stored in the set value storage area by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the above conditions is not established, the control is not performed in the setting change mode, but is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value abnormality error command transmission (step S21TM4190). . As a result, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). To change to the setting change mode ").

  In this way, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn on power again after power off”) ”) Is also performed, the game machine status is set to the setting change mode after the power is restored even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the game shop clerk, etc. are not controlled in the setting change mode, and know that the game is stopped (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). Is possible. Therefore, after turning off the power supply once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game process.

  Thus, when a power interruption occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. Therefore, the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being displayed, and an unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the power cannot be changed to the setting changing mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting changing mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) Will be done. Thereby, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) may not be established, and a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal and the transition to the setting change mode is performed (or the transition condition is satisfied). When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the command, the message “Setting value may be abnormal” and the message “Automatically controlled in the setting change mode” are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game processing, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting switch (clear switch) ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  The production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. In spite of the absence, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed. As a result, the game store clerk clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value was performed despite being not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Can be confirmed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it has been confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  Not only in such a form, but as shown in FIGS. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without confirming whether it is established or not (step S21TM4570, NO).

  In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-11, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is determined (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150). The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled by the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 8-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

  Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power interruption occurs during the change.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-11, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. And (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and is controlled to the setting change mode (determined NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed) (i) to (iii). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

  As described above, when the power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. Regardless of whether or not is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled, so that the workability for determining the set value can be improved.

  If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to Step S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk who has performed the setting value changing operation once sets the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state to confirm the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. The conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation for switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode, Appropriately shift to normal game processing.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification for urging the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be issued. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a set value abnormality error command (to the above-described step S21TM4190). The production control CPU 120 that has received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, “Turn on the lock switch once and switch it off after changing the set value”. The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and FIGS. 8-11, it is impossible to shift to the normal game process when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to make sure that the setting value is changed to the setting change mode and the setting change operation is performed and the setting value is confirmed.

(Set value storage control when power failure occurs while changing set values)
Next, the setting value storage control when the power interruption occurs during the setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

  First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, FIG. Explanation will be made using -12 (1).

  As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “0” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and the read setting value is set to 1. “1” is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “1” to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “2” to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, the power is cut off. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the occurrence of power interruption during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIGS. 8-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

  In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power switch is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. The setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, there may be a setting value that has already been scheduled. Thus, the workability can be improved because the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  Next, regarding a control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  Order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. Accordingly, the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is determined as the final setting value. At this time, “2” is stored as a setting value in the setting value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  Thereafter, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that an operation for turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value that is finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is finished. In any case, when the power is restored, the set value after the change in accordance with the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off is The set value is valid (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  The setting value storage control shown in FIG. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is controlled when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in accordance with the change of the setting value stored in.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled by turning on the power and a setting changing operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is cut off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is It has not been changed since the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on last time is continuously held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

  In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine a set value when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided. Although it is applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, all of the setting values 0 to 5) It can also be applied to a gaming machine whose jackpot probability is 1/300.

  In addition, the feature 21TM discloses the following invention.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when the setting value is changed, it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side However, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp this on the external device side even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in JP 2014-200506 A (paragraph 0102) is applied. is there. The invention relating to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560); ,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output;
The setting means is capable of setting a common predetermined value when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the external device of the state of the gaming machine related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the gaming state with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode) The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during a period corresponding to the predetermined value when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are different outputs while sharing the setting process by the setting means. A period can be set.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing the specific information (setting change flag) in step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the fact that the setting change mode has been entered in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the absence of the condition for shifting to the setting change mode). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is resumed.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, an error notification can be executed in the display means and an error command can be sent to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). 21TM029 can display the letter “E”),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the game hall, and an operation for changing the set value can be prompted.

  Also, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when power supply is stopped when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine. The invention according to the means P1 to the means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. It is to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) And an error notification means capable of performing error notification (the game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that a setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, and a clear switch (setting The changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) If the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification (when the power is turned on, all of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are used). Based on the determination of YES, the process proceeds to the setting change mode without proceeding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed in the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by avoiding unnecessary error notification. Can prompt change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established when the power is turned on (any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO is determined in step S2), the process proceeds to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable can be limited, and appropriate game control can be realized.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the game hall, and an operation for changing the set value can be prompted.

  Also, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when power supply is stopped when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine. The invention relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed There is to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). When it is determined that it is set, control is made to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting changeover switch) Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in the steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). You may further provide the game control microcomputer 100 which performs clear (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control is made to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the mode changes to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If it is remembered, control is made to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030) ), Regardless of whether the conditions for entering the setting change mode are met or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power interruption occurs during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it will be controlled, workability | operativity can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting changing flag is not set at power-on (NO in step S21TM4030)) Is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Is set to the setting change mode), and the setting change mode can be controlled based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is established). Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation The setting information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends)
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether the transition operation is performed or not. Control is made to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not) The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let me)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine a condition for ending the control of the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as jackpot determination processing in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). To exit the setting change mode based on
The setting value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the setting change mode is controlled. (The set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored in the RAM 102). The setting value stored in is changed, so even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after the change operation is retained)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode before the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value is changed according to the setting value. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as jackpot determination processing in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored at that time in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area. To confirm the effective setting value and exit the setting change mode)
The setting value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored unless the lock switch 21TM051 is switched off even when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode. (If the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation regarding feature 026IW)
Next, the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this feature 026IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, control is made so that a small hit is likely to occur, and it is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is lengthened. Also, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, when the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the 2nd KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so as to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature portion 026IW, the probability that the variable winning ball apparatus 6B will be in the open state per normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The ratio determined to be small hit when the first special symbol fluctuates is low, whereas the ratio determined to be small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, it will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is a gaming state that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Note that the configuration for changing the KT state to a gaming state that is likely to have a smaller hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher rate of variation with respect to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a gaming state in which it is easier to hit a smaller game.

  Further, the feature unit 026IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in this feature portion 026IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be opened is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, The game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

(Big hit probability, Small hit probability)
FIGS. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 9-1 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 9-2 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in six steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in two to five steps, or the setting can be changed in seven steps or more.

  First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, in the non-probability change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest hit probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “247/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the overall winning probability is 10 times that of the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The value “1” is the lowest hit probability “2050/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “2470/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B), regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, an uncertain change state (low probability) Regardless of whether the state) or the probability variation state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536”. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. Even in the case where the big hit probability is varied according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B), the loss probability May be configured so that the number of determination values for each setting value is matched by making the setting values different from the setting values “1” to “6”.

  Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, in the non-probability variation state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest hit probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “247/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the overall winning probability is 10 times that in the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The value “1” is the lowest hit probability “2050/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “2470/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), regardless of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probability change state (low probability) Regardless of whether the state is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state), the small hit probability is a constant “62986/65536”. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1), The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of determination values for determining the small hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even in the case where the big hit probability is varied according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), the loss probability May be configured so that the number of determination values for each setting value is matched by making the setting values different from the setting values “1” to “6”.

  In this example, as illustrated in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination values corresponding to the deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all the setting values “1” to “6” (FIG. 9). -1 and FIG. 9-2, there is no set value for which the loss probability is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”). , The probability of loss is different).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a setting value that does not include a determination value corresponding to the loss). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest degree of advantage (the highest hit probability), the loss probability is 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a determination value that does not include a determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 9-1), it may be configured so that the small hit probability is uniformly 0 and the determination value for the small hit is not included. Good.

  In FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), the probability of hitting is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The probability of outliers is different, but in the probability variation state (high probability state), the small hit probability is higher than the non-probability variation state (low probability state) by the amount of increase in the big hit probability for the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The probability of loss may be made to coincide with each other. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Accordingly, in a gaming machine having a substantive settable number of stages of less than six stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of gaming machine having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be made common, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to “2R normal jackpot”, “2R probability variable jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “6R normal jackpot”, “6R probability jackpot”, “9R probability jackpot”, or “16R probability jackpot”.

  As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the feature portion 026IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”, It is determined as “16R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 9%, “6R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 56%, and “6R normal jackpot” with a probability of 35%. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in this feature portion 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “16R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 10%, “9R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 50%, “2R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 5%, and “ 2R normal jackpot ".

  The “16R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 16-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “9R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a nine-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “6R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a six-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, the “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends.

  The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The “2R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and is controlled to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  In this feature portion 026IW, in the case of “16R probability variation big hit”, “9R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, and “6R normal big hit”, in each round of the big hit game (in this example, 30 seconds) or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, the grand prize opening is controlled to be open, and a maximum of 10 big prize openings can be made per round. It is. On the other hand, in the case of “2R probable big hit” and “2R normal big hit”, the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winning prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

  In addition, in this feature portion 026IW, when the big hit game is terminated, it is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. How to change the gaming state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 9-28).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 9-4A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is “small hit A” or “small hit B” based on a random number for hit type determination. ”Or“ small hit C ”is a table referred to for determination.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the feature portion 026IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”, “Small hit A” is determined with a probability of 100%. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in this feature portion 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “small hit B” with a probability of 70% and “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

  In this example, as will be described later, in the case of “small hit A”, the special prize opening is only opened for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-9). You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of “small hit B”, the special prize opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-10), and the game ball wins into the special prize opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of “small hit C”, the special prize opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIGS. 9-11), and the game ball wins into the special prize opening during the small hit game. You can expect the most.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in the feature portion 026IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 is data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative design. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), FIG. 9-5 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the non-KT second variable pattern for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (C) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of place, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of time of 5 minutes.

  In this feature portion 026IW, even when the KT state is in the non-KT state, when the second special symbol change display is executed and a small hit is made, there is a situation where a certain amount of winning balls can be expected due to the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening. End up. Therefore, in this feature portion 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is increased. In this case, the occurrence frequency of the small hits is reduced to prevent the situation where the player is targeted to acquire the winning ball by the small hits even in the non-KT state. In this feature portion 026IW, “occurrence frequency per unit time” is, for example, the rate of occurrence per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, per unit time per unit time The occurrence rate of is higher than the normal state.

  In this feature portion 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the length of 5 minutes relatively long, the act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball by winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state is prevented. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06 To be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is out of place, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Variation pattern for preparation). In the feature unit 026IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, although the frequency of the small hits is increased. The special prize opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball immediately. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win a special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature portion 026IW, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds for the first variation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are changed before the transition to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when the big hit is determined as the first change in the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 06 is determined, and the change display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

  Also, in the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations after executing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 49th variation shown in E) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 Decide on either. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (E), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of place, the second fluctuation pattern # having a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time as short as 5 seconds. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 08 may be determined to be 07 or a shortened variation having a variation time as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. In addition, when the small hit is determined as the second to 49th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortening fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the fluctuation time is further shorter to 1 second. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 11 of the shortening variation is determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored. The second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 include one or more second reserved memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. Further, when the big hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 13 with reach.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation (ie, low probability / final fluctuation in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16 To be determined.

  In the feature portion 026IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), when it is determined that the 50th change in the low probability / first KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display 5 displays a character such as “End of Chance Time!”. Is determined to be the second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by an end display. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “Chance Time End!”. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in the feature portion 026IW, when the first special symbol variation display becomes a big hit during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit immediately occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly disengaged, the forcible disengagement frequently occurs in spite of the second KT state, and the player hits the small hit You will not receive any profits. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the characteristic portion 026IW shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the first special symbol before the forced deviation frequently occurs. It is configured.

  Unlike the feature 026IW, even when the second special symbol starts to change during the big hit change of the first special symbol, the second special symbol does not change forcibly (for example, the first special symbol If the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the gaming time of the first special symbol jackpot variation time in the KT state is a gaming machine with a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed. May be a long variation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit is immediately generated by the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You will not receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time at which small hits can occur at least several times. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or 9R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 9-7 (G) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21 To be determined.

  Similar to the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (G), the variation time is also determined when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of place. There is a case where the second variation pattern # 17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a deviation, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 18 with reach. Also, even when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing the second start winning opening may be determined (second variation pattern # 19). On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (G), when the big hit is determined as the first change in the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  In addition, if a variation display after the second variation is to be executed after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or the 9R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. 9-7 (H The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent variations shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. Is decided.

  Similarly to the 2nd to 49th variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (H), when it is determined that there is a deviation from the 2nd variation in the high probability / first KT state, There are cases where the second fluctuation pattern # 22 with a short fluctuation of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of a short fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1 second are determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation from the second change of the high probability / first KT state, it may be determined to be the second change pattern # 24 with reach. In addition, when a small hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the short fluctuation time of one second is further shortened. There are cases where the second variation pattern # 26 of variation is determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the change may be determined to the second change pattern # 27 with reach. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored. The second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 include one or more second reserved memories stored. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. Further, when the big hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the high probability / second KT state is set, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. .

  As shown in FIG. 9-7 (I), when it is determined that there is a high probability / displacement in the second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 having a normal variation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 having a short variation of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is 5 seconds There are cases where the second variation pattern # 33 of variation is determined. Further, in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 34 with reach.

  When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for variation pattern determination to determine which variation pattern is to be used. FIG. 9-8 is for determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

  As shown in FIG. 9-8, in this feature portion 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, Regardless of the set value “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the second KT state, there is a high probability that a variation pattern of a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

  In FIG. 9-8, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case where the small hit variation of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 show the variation pattern table. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the case of a low probability state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in a case of a high probability state.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 9-9 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. FIG. 9-10 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 when the small hit B is achieved. FIGS. 9-11 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 when the small hit C is obtained. 9-9 (1) to FIG. 9-11 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 9-9 (2). FIGS. 9-11 (2) each show an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1). As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 When the symbol change display is executed and the normal symbol is determined to be per unit, the normal symbol display unit 20 derives and displays the hit symbol, and when it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display unit 20 displays the out symbol. Is done. In this feature 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the off symbol is made. The time is 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds elapses, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 second has elapsed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, when the small hit symbol is A, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of a small hit A) Since the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the elapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the next normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning port opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds. is there. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 026IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened.

  Further, in this feature 026IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening release pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds, The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is Since the time until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is shorter, the variable winning ball device 6B has already been opened. When being controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 without changing the normal symbol is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2). As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 When the symbol variation display is executed and it is determined that the symbol is per unit, the symbol symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 20, and when it is determined that the symbol is off, the symbol symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 20. Is done. In this feature 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), the normal symbol variation time is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the off symbol is displayed. The time is 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won at the second starting winning opening.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, when the small hit is A, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is as extremely short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature portion 026IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Accordingly, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, the game balls are likely to enter the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 on the downstream side, and the game balls are likely to win the special prize opening. However, in the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that even if it is in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, a game ball is likely to win a special winning opening, and it is easy to obtain a winning ball. In this example, this is also referred to as “small hit RUSH”. In the second KT state, “small hit RUSH” "" Is displayed.

  Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is changed depending on which of the small hit types A to C is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 may be configured to be opened differently depending on which of the small hit types A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball apparatus 17 may be configured to open 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is executed by performing the opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 for 0.4 seconds four times. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type that allows a game ball to win to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where there are three types of small hit types A to C is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and, for example, four or more types of small hit types are provided. Also good.

  Also, in this feature 026IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After the 3.8 seconds of the total symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning port opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds have elapsed, The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 without a normal symbol variation is less likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In the feature unit 026IW, the normal symbol process display is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. This is performed by executing (see step S26). In addition, in the normal symbol process of step S26, the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, whether or not to hit the usual figure is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

  In this feature 026IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the normal symbol variation time and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the second start winning opening release pre-processing time is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, you may comprise so that the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may differ by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be varied. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state. .

  In this feature 026IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state, whereby FIGS. 9-9 (1) to FIG. As shown in 9-11 (1), the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled so as to have a long open time. In the second KT state, the variable baseball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. Control is done to shorten the time.

  For example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9- When the variable winning ball apparatus 6B as shown in 11 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and the special flag is not set, FIGS. 9-9 (2) to 9-11. You may comprise so that the variable winning ball apparatus 6B shown to (2) may be controlled by the 2nd opening pattern (short opening) which opens for a short time. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and control may be performed so that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit gaming state.

  Even in the first KT state, when the last change display in the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop in the 50th special symbol shortened fluctuation period in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, when a left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening variation of the special symbol variation display is further used. The special symbol variation display may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible to prevent winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this feature portion 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the ordinary symbol is not stored This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the timing of the second special symbol variation stop (when passing the small symbol, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the pass gate The variable winning ball device 6B is not released until the game ball that has passed 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and a special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature portion 026IW, by shortening the normal symbol variation time, the variable winning ball device 6B is released before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a capture element due to a launch operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  9-12 and FIGS. 9-13 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9-12, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a symbol variation pattern. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of decorative symbols. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit designation command)) which designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) which designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. . Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In the feature unit 026IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command. Therefore, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result designation command is for the first special symbol and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol, the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol may be different from the display result designation command for the second special symbol.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit a display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit / 9R probability variation big hit / 6R certain variation big hit / 6R normal variation big hit / 2R normal variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / off The variation pattern command may be determined in correspondence with, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is finished. Command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed display 26 has started.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective starting winning designation command, but this feature unit 026IW The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  Command C 801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that the first customer is waiting (the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that the second customer is waiting (the second special symbol is not changed and the second reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that specifies a setting value that is currently set. A setting value is set in “XX”. For example, when the set value “1” is set, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. For example, when the setting value “6” is set, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

  When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, FIG. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed in accordance with the contents shown in 9-12 and FIGS. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed presentation control command relating to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

  FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where neither the first big hit game (special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step 026IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the first reserved memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the gaming control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and reads the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 026IWS53A), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 026IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are: The order of extraction is also stored in an identifiable manner.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 026IWS55A, the set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started. However, the setting change process (process for changing the set value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when the is executed.

  Note that the timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the set value command is transmitted at the end of the variable display, or the set value command is transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is present, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / first KT state is determined and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variation flag is ON and the high base flag is ON, the high probability / first KT state is determined. If the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the probability is high / second KT state and the high probability / second KT background designation command is Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol jackpot change is in progress (step 026IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big special hit of the second special symbol is being changed. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A without performing the processing after step 026IWS58A. Thereby, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when a big hit variation of the second special symbol is being performed at step 026IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 026IWS59A, Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing at step 026IWS57A, the processing is not performed at steps 026IWS58A to S63A, and a random number (fixed value) is set as a random number for hit determination and set to a small value. By making a hit determination, it may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning.

  If the second special symbol jackpot change is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 026IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is made when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 026IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, or 6R normal big hit (step 026IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 026IWS63A), and step 026IWS69A. Migrate to

  If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 026IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol ( Step 026IWS66A). The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step 026IWS67A) and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined as the small hit type A (see FIG. 9-4 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step 026IWS69A). If it is “0”, step 026IWS75A is determined. Migrate to When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 026IWS70A), It is determined whether or not “0” has been reached (step 026IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 026IWS72A) and shortens the special symbol variation display. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 026IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A.

  In this feature 026IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / This is a case where 50 times of variable display is executed under the control of the high base state (low probability / first KT state). In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 026IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 026IWS72A and S72B. In addition to being reset, the special time flag is also reset in steps 026IWS73A and S73B, and a transition is made to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

  In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed notification and continues the right-handed state. As a gaming state, although the high base state ends, the variation shortened in common with the first KT state It is a flag for making a production background common to the first KT state while setting the state.

  In step 026IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 026IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 026IWS75A.

  In step 026IWS59A, whether or not to win is determined using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sets whether or not the special-design time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is set. (Step 026IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the control for shortening the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 9-5). ~ See FIG. 9-7), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-shown state shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 026IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 026IWS1702A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table decided to be used in steps 026IWS1701A and S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, The variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-5 is determined (step 026IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1704A).

  Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 026IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and changes the variation time. Is started (step 026IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device 4A is started to display the variation of the first special symbol (step 026IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 026IWS1707A).

  FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first determines, if not yet transmitted, any display result designation command (display result) based on the determination result as to whether or not the jackpot is determined and the determination result of the jackpot type. 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

  If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  If the second special symbol display device 4B has not derived and displayed the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B has derived and displayed the small bonus symbol (step 026IWS1125A). Whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set.

  If the second special symbol display device 4B has derived and displayed the big hit symbol (Y in step 026IWS1124A) or if the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed (Y in step 026IWS1125A), the CPU 103 performs the CPU 120 for effect control. The control for transmitting the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 026IWS1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

  By executing the processing of steps 026IWS1124A and S1125A, in this feature portion 026IW, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol The change display is forcibly stopped so that a big hit or a small hit does not occur simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly discontinued, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1124A. As a result, control is performed to forcibly discontinue and display the symbols.

  If neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step 026IWS1124A, N in step 026IWS1125A), the processing is ended as it is.

  FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 026IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2012A) and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the player who performed the right-handed operation Is advantageous to the player and the right handed indicator 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the process of steps 026IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed, so that the 50th variation display is performed. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the process of steps 026IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays a stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 026IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 indicates that the jackpot signal 1 (signal indicating that the jackpot game is being played) and the jackpot signal 2 (signal indicating that the jackpot is being played) are output to the outside. The big hit signal output flag is set (step 026IWS2017A). In the feature section 026IW, based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2017A, the information output processing (step S23) is executed, and external output of the big hit signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the big hit signal 2 If the external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big prize opening (step 026IWS2018A), sets round 1 release pattern data corresponding to the big hit type (step 026IWS2019A), and sets “1” to the round number counter indicating the number of big wins. "Is set (step 026IWS2020A).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control for starting lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2021A) and performs control for transmitting a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022A).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023A).

  By executing the processing of steps 026IWS2021A and S2022A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 is started when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

  When the first big hit flag is not set (N in Step 026IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (Step 026IWS2024A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation | designated command with respect to CPU120 for presentation control is performed (step 026IWS2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit release pre-processing (step 026IWS2029A).

  In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when the winning combination is the small hit in the first special symbol variation display, there is only the case where the small hit type is the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. For this reason, in this example, when the first special symbol variation display is a small hit, the right-handed indicator 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

  If the first small hit flag is not set (N in Step 026IWS2024A), CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (Step 026IWS2030A).

  In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. Yes. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right-handed notification. It may be.

  Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the second special symbol, the right-handed notification and the firing promotion notification are not executed, and when the game ball is won in the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification and the firing promotion notification are performed. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for the gate to pass, even if a game ball wins the first start winning opening, the first special symbol does not start to be displayed immediately, and the first reserved memory is stored.) You may comprise.

  Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output with a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when a game ball winning in the second start winning opening or special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), a mode with a high recognition degree (for example, a sound output of a large volume or A left-handed notification may be performed by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the configuration described above, a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area performs a light left-hand notification with a low recognition degree to the surroundings of the gaming machine. A player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation may be configured to perform a left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. If comprised in that way, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged to return to the left-handed operation from the store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second start winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. The passing gate 41 gives a left-handed notification when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and the second start winning opening or special winning opening has a predetermined number. Alternatively, a left-handed notification may be performed when a small number of game balls (for example, one) are detected.

  Further, for example, an external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the passage gate 41, while an external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. May be.

  In this feature section 026IW, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, to the passing gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

  FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 026IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the processing is terminated as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the high base flag, and the special figure time-short flag if set, and the high base number counter Is cleared to 0 (step 026IWS2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first jackpot release pre-processing (step 026IWS2506A).

  In this feature portion 026IW, when the first gate passage waiting process is executed, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passing gate 41 If the game ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21, the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  FIGS. 9-19 and FIGS. 9-20 are flowcharts showing the first big hit end process (step S118A) in the first special symbol process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200A). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2201A), and the first big hit end designation command is transmitted (step 026IWS2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step 026IWS2203A), and the processing is ended.

  In step 026IWS2204A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 026IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205A). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been terminated this time is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step 026IWS2206A). It can be determined whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit is, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207A), and is in the process of shortening the special symbol variation display. A special figure time reduction flag indicating this is set and a transition is made to the KT state (step 026IWS2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If it is not the 16R probability variable big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been terminated this time is the 6R probability variable big hit (step 026IWS2209A). Whether or not it is 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212A) and sets the high base flag to transition to the high base state (step 026IWS2213A). Further, the special time flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, if the 6R probability variation big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  In the case of 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 026IWS2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains zero. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In step 026IWS2010A of the first special symbol stop process, it is determined as Y, and the high base number counter subtraction process in step 026IWS2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not a 6R probability variable big hit (ie, if it is a 6R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2219A), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to the KT state. Transition (step 026IWS2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2223A).

  FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing the first small hitting end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process. In the first small hitting end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hitting end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A). If the small hitting end display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304A. If the small hitting end display timer is not set, the first small hitting flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and control for transmitting a small hitting end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303A). finish.

  In step 026IWS2304A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

  FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process is a state where the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol. In addition, there is a case where neither the second big hit game (special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened).

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved memory number (step 026IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the second reserved memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the gaming control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and reads the RAM 102. In the second random number buffer area (step 026IWS53B), the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 026IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 026IWS55B, a set value command is transmitted each time a variable display is started. However, a setting change process (a process for changing a set value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when the is executed.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 026IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol jackpot change is in progress (step 026IWS57B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed. If it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B without performing the processing after step 026IWS58B. Thereby, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57B, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) that is out of place as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 026IWS59B, so that Regardless of whether or not the winning hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing at step 026IWS57B, the random number value (fixed value) is set to a small value (fixed value) as a hit judgment random number without performing the processing of steps 026IWS58B to S63B. By making a hit determination, it may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58B) and executes the big hit judgment module (step 026IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is made when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is decided to win (step 026IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 026IWS61B). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variation big hit, 9R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step 026IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 026IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

  If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 026IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit based on the variation display of the second special symbol ( Step 026IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step 026IWS67B) and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined as small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 9-4 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is “0” (step 026IWS69B), and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the high base number counter (step 026IWS70B), It is determined whether or not “0” has been reached (step 026IWS71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 026IWS72B) and shortens the special symbol variation display. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 026IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B.

  In step 026IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 026IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 026IWS75B.

  In step 026IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIGS. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-15, the second variation pattern process has been described by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 026IWS1700A to check whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-shown pattern shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected. If the special time flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the gaming control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether or not the probability change flag and the high base flag are set and the number of changes. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 9-6 (D) to 9-7 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) If the 2nd to 49th variation is selected, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (E) is selected. If the 50th variation is selected, the second variation shown in FIG. 9-6 (F) is selected. Select a special pattern variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if the first variation, the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7 (G) A pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-7 (H) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-7 (I) is selected.

  The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) shown in FIGS. 9-16. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 9-16, the second special symbol variation process has been described by replacing “first” with “second”.

  In the second special symbol variation process, the same processing as in steps 026IWS1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation process is executed, and the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol. If so, control for transmitting the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be out of force. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the short-time state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing of the absence of the player Can be suppressed.

  In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (to the right of the game area) ( In a gaming machine configured to provide a start winning opening that is not a variable winning ball device, and to transition to the normal state via the time-short state of the first special symbol after completion of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, a configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is increased, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also increased, and accordingly, the variation display of the second special symbol is not forced. The occurrence frequency of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the big hit at the unintended timing of the absence of the player can be further suppressed. Can do.

  FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 026IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2012B) and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013B).

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays a stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 026IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2016B). If the special time flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the process proceeds to step 026IWS2018B.

  If the special time flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot signal output flag (step 026IWS2017B). In the feature section 026IW, based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2017B, the information output processing (step S23) is executed, and external output of the big hit signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the big hit signal 2 If the external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 026IWS2018B), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 026IWS2019B), and sets “1” to the round number counter (step). 026IWS2020B).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control for starting lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2021B) and performs control for transmitting a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023B).

  By executing the processing of steps 026IWS2021B and S2022B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 is started when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  When the second big hit flag is not set (N in Step 026IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (Step 026IWS2024B). When the 2nd small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation | designated command with respect to CPU120 for presentation control is performed (step 026IWS2025B).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2026B). If the special time flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control for starting the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2027B) and at the same time with respect to the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a strike lighting start designation command (step 026IWS2028B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit pre-release process (step 026IWS2029B).

  By executing the processing of steps 026IWS2027B and S2028B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 is started when a small hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit.

  However, in this example, even if it is a small hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is in effect, the right-handed indicator 26 is already on. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process in step 026IWS2026B, the right-handed indicator 26 starts to be turned on again when the small special hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state. Or sending a right-handed lighting start designation command.

  If the second small hit flag is not set (N in Step 026IWS2024B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (Step 026IWS2030B).

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 026IWS2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the processing is terminated as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2502B). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the process proceeds to step 026IWS2504B.

  If the special time flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot signal output flag (step 026IWS2503B). The feature unit 026IW executes an information output process (step S23) based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2503B, and starts the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer. If the external output is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, if it is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special time flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 026IWS2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second jackpot release pre-processing (step 026IWS2506B).

  In this feature portion 026IW, when the second gate passage waiting process is executed, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passing gate 41 If the game ball passes through and is detected by the gate switch 21, the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  FIGS. 9-25 and 9-26 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot end process in the second special symbol process. In the second jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200B). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2201B), and the second big hit end designation command is transmitted (step 026IWS2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step 026IWS2203B), and the processing is ended.

  In step 026IWS2204B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 026IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205B). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205B), the CPU 103 confirms whether the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit (step 026IWS2206B). Whether 16R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207B), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to transition to the KT state ( Step 026IWS2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. In the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If neither the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is found, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has been completed this time is the 9R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209B). Whether or not it is a 9R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212B), and sets the high base flag to transition to the high base state (step 026IWS2213B). Further, the special time flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, when the 9R probability variation big hit is achieved, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  In the case of 9R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 026IWS2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains zero. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 9R probability variable big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In the second special symbol stop process, Y is determined in step 026IWS2010B, and the high base number counter subtraction process in step 026IWS2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not a 9R probability variable big hit (ie, if it is a 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets a high base flag and shifts to a high base state (step 026IWS2219B), and sets a special figure time reduction flag to a KT state. Transition (step 026IWS2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of 2R normal big hit, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2223B).

  FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing a second small hit end process in the second special symbol process. In the second small hitting end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hitting end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B). If the small hitting end display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. If the small hitting end display timer is not set, the second small hitting flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and control for transmitting a small hitting end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303B). finish.

  In step 026IWS2304B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2305B), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special time flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2307B) and to the effect control CPU 120 to the right Control is performed to transmit a strike lighting end designation command (step 026IWS2308B).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2309B).

  Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW will be described. FIG. 9-28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in the feature unit 026IW. First, in this feature portion 026IW, in a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball firing operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area. For this reason, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first starting winning opening, and a variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 16R probability variation big hit, a 6R probability variation big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game ends, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) shifts, The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 026IWS2206A to S2208A). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) until the next jackpot occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209A and S2212A to S2214A). Also, if 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game is finished, shift to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and whether the next big hit will occur The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 026IWS2219A to S2221A).

  In this feature 026IW, when the player has moved to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the player aims at the right side of the game area. The game ball is fired (right-handed). For this reason, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second starting winning opening, and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 16R positive variation big hit, a 9R positive variable big hit, a 2R positive variable big hit, or a 2R normal big hit is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 9-28, if a 16R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). Also, if a 9R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the transition to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) occurs after the big hit game ends. Until the next big hit occurs, the high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). In this feature portion 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of 9R probability variation is 50% (see FIG. 9-3). When the base state is reached, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), after the big hit game is over, a transition is made to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

  As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, if a 9R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the transition to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) occurs after the big hit game ends. Until the next big hit occurs, the high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the transition to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) occurs after the big hit game ends. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B). In the feature portion 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 2R normal big hit is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. After the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit has occurred and the low probability / high base state is reached, the next big hit does not occur and 50 times of variable display is completed. As shown, the low-probability / low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 026IWS2010A to S2014A).

  As shown in FIG. 9-28, if a 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the high probability / low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In this feature portion 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. % (See FIGS. 9-3 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, if a 9R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Until the next big hit occurs, the high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

  In FIG. 9-28, the case where the first special symbol variation display is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is explained, but the second special symbol variation is performed at a low rate. There is also a possibility that the display is executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 9R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display ends. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls is paid out. The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal (ie, a signal indicating that a jackpot game is being played) that is continuously output over the duration of all jackpot games. The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal (that is, a signal indicating that the game is being extended) continuously output during the period of all jackpot games and during the KT state. In addition, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning award winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of a game ball to the special winning award. In addition, a prize ball number signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball planned number signal is a signal output externally every time the number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

  Each of the external signals shown in FIGS. 9-29 includes, for example, the timing of paying out 10 winning balls, the timing of generating a big hit, the timing of generating a winning at a special winning opening, and the expected number of winning balls reaches 10. A flag (for example, refer to steps 026IWS2017A, S2017B, and S2503B) and a timer corresponding to the output of the external signal are set at the timing, and information output processing (step S23) is executed based on the setting of the flag and the timer. Is output externally to a hall computer or the like.

  Next, the output timing of jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 among the external output signals will be described. FIG. 9-30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. In this example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2503B, so that the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 Starts external output. Thereafter, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game is finished. In the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state is terminated. On the other hand, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2017B when the gaming state is the KT state, and external output of the big hit signal 1 is started. The In this case, since it is in the KT state, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. Thereafter, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot game is finished.

  First, the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) will be described using FIG. 9-30 (1). As shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), when the game state is the normal state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. The external output of jackpot signal 1 is started at the same timing, and the external output of jackpot signal 2 is started (see step 026IWS2017A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 are displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. The external output is not started, and the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is started and the external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started at a timing when the game ball wants to pass through the passing gate 41 (see step 026IWS2503B).

  Next, using FIG. 9-30 (2), the jackpot signal 1 and jackpot when the gaming state is the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), when the gaming state is the KT state, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. The external output of jackpot signal 1 is started at the same timing (see step 026IWS2017A). In addition, when the gaming state is the KT state, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Start (see step 026IWS2017B). As shown in FIG. 9-30 (2), the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside in the KT state.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 026IWS5111). Control to transmit a gate passage designation command to the CPU 120 for effect control is performed (step 026IWS5112). The CPU 103 then executes a gate switch passage process (step 026IWS5113).

  In the feature unit 026IW, when the processing of steps 026IWS 5111 to S5113 is executed, and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature portion 026IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also serves as an operating area. Is the gate passing waiting state before the big hit game is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed? Regardless of whether or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

  Then, CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 026IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  In this feature 026IW, regardless of whether or not it is in a gate passage waiting state, if it is detected in step 026IWS5111 that a game ball has passed to the passage gate 41, the gate switch passage processing in step 026IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the normal symbol change display is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when not waiting for the gate to pass, and the normal symbol is displayed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing waiting state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display.

  In this feature 026IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol process (see steps S25A and S25B) is normal in the timer interrupt process. Since the process is executed prior to the symbol process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the pass gate 41 as the normal start area is performed after the process of detecting the pass of the game ball of the pass gate 41 as the operation area is performed. A detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

  Gate switch passage processing (step 026IWS5113): The CPU 103 determines that the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, “ 4)) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the general-purpose hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for extracting the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol and storing it in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 026IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol) When the display 20 does not display the change of the normal symbol and when the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is not in the open / close operation based on the normal symbol display 20 being hit and displayed, the gate pass memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step 026IWS5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 026IWS5102).

  Normal symbol stop process (step 026IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, it checks whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the time before the normal electric accessory is released is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 026IWS5103).

  Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 026IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer Is started, and opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step 026IWS5104).

  Normal electric accessory operation processing (step 026IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100).

  FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 026IWS5121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step 026IWS5121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 026IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step 026IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing memory number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 026IWS5123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number for determination per normal symbol) using the normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not per normal symbol, and whether or not per normal symbol. Is determined (step 026IWS5127). In this feature section 026IW, in step 026IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probability variation state, whether it is in the KT state, or in the high base state. The probability is determined to be per ordinary symbol.

  In step 026IWS5127, when the read random number value for normal symbol determination is within the winning range (if it is a winning), CPU 103 sets the winning symbol as a display result (step 026IWS5128), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130. Also, in step 026IWS5127, if the read random number value for normal symbol determination is not within the winning range (if it is out of range), the CPU 103 sets a display symbol as a display result (step 026IWS5129), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130.

  In step 026IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step 026IWS5130, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol change time (N in step 026IWS5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101) (step 026IWS5133).

  FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step 026IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 026IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 026IWS3702), the process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (in step 026IWS5127). (Step 026IWS3703). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step 026IWS5127 and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step 026 IWS 3708).

  In step 026IWS 3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 026IWS 3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS 3704). That is, when the state is the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 026IWS3706). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 026IWS3705). .

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 026IWS5103) (step 026IWS3707).

  FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 026IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by −1 (step 026IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 026IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory release has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 026IWS3805). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 026IWS3804).

  As described above, in this feature 026IW, the normal electric accessory release time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric accessory release time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to start and win the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Accordingly, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

  Note that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second start winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown by the feature portion 026IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is released many times compared to the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). Control may be performed such that 1 is set as the number of times of opening of 6B, whereas 2 times is set as the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state. If it does in that way, when it is in the 1st KT state, it can make it easy to make a start winning in the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth by increasing the number of times of opening of variable winning ball device 6B.

  Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B described above, and the variable winning ball device 6B It may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state (step 026IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation processing (step 026IWS5104) (step 026IWS3807).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 9-35 to 9-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 026IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 026IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 026IWS613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 026IWS 614), effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 026IWS615).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 026IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 026IWS618).

  If the received presentation control command is a display result designation command (step 026IWS619), the presentation control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS620). ).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 026 IWS621). ), The effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 026IWS622).

  If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. (Step 026IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag according to the received jackpot start designation command (step 026IWS625).

  If the received effect control command is the first jackpot end designation command or the second jackpot end designation command (step 026 IWS 626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. (Step 026IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first jackpot end designation command reception flag or the second jackpot end designation command reception flag in accordance with the received jackpot end designation command (step 026IWS628).

  In this example, the right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 026IWS624 and S627.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 026IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 026IWS630).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 026IWS632).

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 026IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 026IWS634).

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 026IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 026IWS636).

  If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 026IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 uses the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, The display control is performed with a blue background image (step 026IWS638). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 026IWS639).

  If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 026IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 uses the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image corresponding to the low probability / first KT state (for example, The display control is performed with a green background image (step 026IWS641). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 026IWS642) and, if set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state or the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 026IWS643).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 026IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the background image in the image display device 5 is a background image corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, The display control is performed with a yellow background image (step 026IWS645). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 026IWS646) and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 026IWS647).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 026IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 uses a background image in the image display device 5 as a background image corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Control is performed to display with a red background image (step 026IWS649). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 026IWS650), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 026IWS651).

  If the received effect control command is a big winning opening prize designation command (step 026IWS652), the effect control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state. 15 is added to the value of the counter ball number counter for consecutive small hits (step 026IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120 is generated in the image display device 5 during the second KT state in which the small hits are continuously generated based on the value of the small winning consecutive middle prize ball counter after the addition. If the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 indicating the number of winning balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 (step 026IWS654).

  In this example, the small winning consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 is started when a 16R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state. The display is terminated when a big hit occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hitting consecutive middle prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than any threshold (step 026IWS655). If the value of the small winning consecutive middle prize ball counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to add the value of the small winning consecutive middle prize ball counter. Control is performed to display the small winning consecutive medium winning ball number display 2 in accordance with (step 026IWS656). For example, if the value of the counter ball number counter for consecutive small hits after addition is 1000, 1005, or 1010, it means that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 in this big winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and a small hitting continuous winning ball number display 2 indicating that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as “1000OVER” is displayed as the small winning consecutive medium winning ball number display 2.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening prize designation command (step 026IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small winning consecutive middle prize ball counter (step 026IWS658). Next, the effect control CPU 120 continuously plays the small hits if the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit consecutive medium winning ball counter. Control to update the middle prize ball number display 1 is performed (step 026IWS659).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hitting consecutive middle prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 026IWS660). If the value of the small winning consecutive middle prize ball counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to add the value of the small winning consecutive middle prize ball counter. Control is performed to display the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 2 in accordance with (step 026IWS661). For example, if the value of the counter ball number counter during consecutive small hits after the addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 in this big winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 2 indicating that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as “1000OVER” is displayed as the small winning consecutive medium winning ball number display 2.

  In addition, in this example, the case where the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 2 is displayed based on winning in the big winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when a winning to the general winning opening 10 occurs during the consecutive small hits in the second KT state, the value corresponding to the number of winning balls for winning the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of consecutive winning balls in the small winning consecutive It may be added to the counter to update the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 or display the small hit consecutive medium winning ball number display 2.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120 executes processing for storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 026IWS662). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS611.

  In the feature unit 026IW, the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) executes a demonstration display control process, for example, in an effect control process (step S76). 9-38 and 9-39 are flowcharts showing the demo display control process. In the demonstration display control process, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received (step 026IWS4701), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4706. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in a normal state (step 026IWS 4702). If it is not in a normal state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS 4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state nor the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state is set, the normal state is determined.

  Whether or not the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received is determined, for example, when the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4701, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

  Further, the first KT state flag and the second KT state flag are, for example, a low accuracy / first KT background designation command, a high accuracy / first KT background designation command, and a high probability / second KT background designation in the command analysis process (step S75). Set based on receipt of command.

  In the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 sets a first demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4703), A first demonstration standby flag indicating that the first demonstration display is waiting is set (step 026IWS4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4705).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first demonstration standby flag is set (step 026IWS4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4707). Y), or when the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4708), the process proceeds to step 026IWS4712. Thus, the first demonstration display is not executed when the first special symbol variation is started or the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step 026IWS4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation is started. In step 026IWS4708, when the second jackpot start designation command is received, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol.

  When the first demonstration standby flag is set, the first special symbol variation is not started (N in Step 026IWS4707), and it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the variation in the second special symbol (N in Step 026IWS4708) Then, the value of the first demonstration standby timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS4709), and when the first demonstration standby timer times out (Y in step 026IWS4710), the first demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4711). The standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4712).

  Thereafter, when the first demonstration display is being performed (Y in step 026IWS4713), the effect control CPU 120 starts the change in the first special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4714) or based on the change in the second special symbol. If the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state (Y in step 026IWS4715), the first demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4716).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received (step 026IWS4801), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4806. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step 026IWS4802). If it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4805. Specifically, if either the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set, the KT state is determined.

  Whether the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received or not is determined, for example, when the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4801, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

  In the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets a second demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to a time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4803), A second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step 026IWS4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4805).

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second demonstration standby flag is set (step 026IWS4806). If the second special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4807), Y), or when not in the KT state (N in Step 026IWS4808), the process proceeds to Step 026IWS4812. Thus, the second demonstration display is not executed when the second special symbol variation is started or the KT state is ended. Specifically, in step 026IWS4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second special symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation is started. In step 026IWS4808, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

  When the second demonstration standby flag is set, the second special symbol variation is not started (N in Step 026IWS4807), and the KT state is not finished (Y in Step 026IWS4808), the value of the second demonstration standby timer Is subtracted by 1 (step 026IWS4809), and if the second demonstration standby timer times out (Y in step 026IWS4810), the second demonstration display is started (step 026IWS4811), and the second demonstration standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4812). ).

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control is in the second demonstration display (Y in Step 026IWS4813), whether the second special symbol is changed (Y in Step 026IWS4814), or the KT state is ended (Step N of 026IWS4815), the second demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4816).

  FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 026IWS811). Whether or not a variation pattern command has been received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 026IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 026 IWS 812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), it is determined whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 026IWS813). Note that whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026IWS815).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is a case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. (Step 026IWS814). Note that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation pattern # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026IWS816).

  By executing the processing of steps 026IWS812 to S815, in this feature portion 026IW, in the non-KT state, the decorative display of the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the first special design. When it is executed and is in the KT state, the decorative display is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. The variation display of the decorative design is not executed.

  FIG. 9-41 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 026 IWS 920). Whether or not the first special symbol variation display is to be executed is determined, for example, by the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifying the first variation pattern # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 026 IWS 921). Whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a display result 8 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a non-reach off symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step 026IWS922).

  As already described, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game I can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 026IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, the non-reach off symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents excessive expectations from the player.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (N in Step 026IWS920) or when it is not the small hit variation (N in Step 026IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol in accordance with the variation display result. Is determined (step 026IWS923). In step 026IWS923, when the display control 1 CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined that it is out of place), the left / right / right decorative pattern is completely different from the left / right decorative pattern. Matched reach-removed symbol combinations are determined. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when 16R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative symbol is the same as the odd symbol “7” is determined. When the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command is received (when 9R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit is determined), the left and right decorative symbols are odd numbers other than “7”. Determine the combination of the symbols that you have prepared. When a display result 6 designation command is received (when 2R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols including a special symbol (in this example, symbol “R”) is determined. . In addition, when a display result 5 designation command or a display result 7 designation command is received (when 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are even-numbered. To decide. Further, when the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variation display is out of date (step 026IWS924). Note that whether or not the current variable display is out of date is, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a display result 1 designation command. Can be determined. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 026IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 026IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of a setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set value. (Step 026IWS925).

  In step 026IWS925, CPU 120 for effect control specifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 026IWS615). Then, the CPU 120 for effect control performs a lottery process based on a random number using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestion effect. The presence / absence and type of value suggesting effects are determined.

  FIGS. 9-42 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-42, the set value suggestion effect determination table includes no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Determination values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

  The setting value suggestion effect A is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect B is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Is the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Is the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is an effect that is executed, for example, in an aspect in which a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Is the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggesting effect F is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 6 "is the highest execution ratio.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 026IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 026IWS 926), that is, if it is in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 026IWS927).

  9-43 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-43, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there are no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been allocated. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is an effect that is executed, for example, in a manner in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. In addition, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is an effect that is executed, for example, in a manner in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “2”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is obtained. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the execution ratio is the set value “3”, and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the setting value “4”. Is the next highest, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is “5”, and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the setting value is “6” It is low.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-43, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is “1”, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B when the setting value is “6”. The execution rate of is the highest.

  In this example, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot probability is the lowest, and when the set value is “6”, the jackpot probability is the highest. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value “1” is the setting state where the second KT state is most likely to continue (the continuation expectation is high), and the setting value “6”. It can be said that there is a setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is “6”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

  As described above, the expected degree of continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is an expectation for a long control period to the second KT state without generating a big hit.

  Further, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. A sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH) can be further increased.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the decorative pattern variation pattern to be used and the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. The process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 026IWS928).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 026IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 026IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 026IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  If execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the step 026IWS 930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display (during the variation variation).

  If execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is determined, step 026IWS930 and variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation display (during the variation variation in the second KT state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer and starts the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 026IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step 026IWS932).

  FIG. 9-44 and FIG. 9-45 are flowcharts showing the special figure waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process. In the special symbol waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol is set (step 026IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706. In this feature portion 026IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 026IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set is a stage where the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed but the effect during the big hit is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 026IWS9703 is performed. Without execution, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol is set. (Step 026IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9716. In this feature portion 026IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 026IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set is a stage where the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed but the effect during the small hit is not yet executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 026IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 026IWS9716 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the stop symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (out-of-order symbols, jackpot symbols to be displayed on the image display device 5). , A small hit symbol) is controlled (step 026IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, in step 026IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the off symbol.

  When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y in step 026IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 026IWS9705).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands (first jackpot start designation command, second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 026 IWS9706). If any jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 026IWS9707).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been generated this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 026IWS9708). Whether or not the big hit type is 16R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 6 designation command. it can. If it is 16R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9710 as it is.

  If neither the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit is in the second KT state, it means that the second KT state is ended after the end of the current big hit game. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the values of the small hit consecutive number counter for counting the number of times that the small hits are continuously generated during the second KT state and the value of the small hit consecutive middle prize ball number counter to zero ( Step 026IWS9709).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the big hit production (step 026IWS9710). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 026IWS9711), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, and speakers 8L and 8R as effect components) is executed according to data 1) (step 026IWS9712).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 026IWS9713).

  If the big hit symbol has not been fixedly displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (N in step 026IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y in step 026IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 026IWS9715).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hitting start designation command has been received (step 026IWS9716). If the small hitting start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 026IWS9717).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hits continuous number counter (step 026IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit consecutive number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the value of the updated small hit consecutive number counter. Then, control is performed to update the small hits continuous number display 1 (step 026IWS9719).

  In this example, the small hit consecutive number display 1 is displayed when a 16R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 16R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit is displayed. The display is terminated when it occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition is any threshold value (step 026IWS9720). If the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition is any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small hit consecutive number corresponding to the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition. Control to display display 2 is performed (step 026IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition is 10, it means that the small hit consecutive number has reached 10 times due to the occurrence of the small hit this time, so the threshold “10” is reached. It is determined that the number of consecutive small hits has reached 10 times, and the small hits continuous number display 2 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “10COMBO” as the small consecutive number display 2.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step 026IWS9722). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 026IWS9723), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, and speakers 8L and 8R as effect components) is executed according to data 1) (step 026IWS9724).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting effect process (step S174) (step 026IWS9725).

  When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step 026IWS9704 and N in step 026IWS9714), the production control CPU 120 performs the production control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 026IWS9726).

  Next, the effect aspect of the effect performed in this characteristic part 026IW is demonstrated. First, an effect aspect of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIGS. 9-46 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of a setting value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the set value suggestion effect in the variation display of the decorative symbols that are out of place. As shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), when the display display 5 is performing the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols, when the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached, FIG. 9-46 (B1 As shown in (B3) to (B3), the set value suggesting effect is executed during the decorative pattern variation display.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggesting effect is executed in a manner in which a predetermined character image 026IW001, 026IW002, 026IW003 is displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B1), the image display device 5 sets the predetermined character image 026IW001 in a blue display color. A value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B2), the set value is set according to a mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B3), the set value is set in a manner in which the predetermined character image 026IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-46, the case where the set value suggesting effect A, the set value suggesting effect C, and the set value suggesting effect E are executed is shown. A predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

  In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player, depending on whether a character image with a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern that is out of place Can give you a sense of expectation.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. FIGS. 9-47 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

  In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), for example, the character display 026IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed in a recognizable manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed when the left and right decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which predetermined effect images 026IW005 and 026IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images 026IW005 and 026IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, a predetermined effect image 026IW005 is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B1). Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. For example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B2), the image display device 5 displays the predetermined effect image 026IW005 in red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

  In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is displayed during execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variation display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether the effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

  Next, a display mode of right-handed notification will be described. FIGS. 9-48 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of a right-handed alert | report. In this example, when a big hit game is being played, regardless of whether the first special symbol variation display is a big hit or the second special symbol fluctuation display is executed and the big win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 026IWS2021A and S2021B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the right-handed notification LED 37 (steps 026IWS2022A, S2022B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 026IWS624).

  Also, in this example, when the small special hit is displayed in the second special symbol variation display, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 026IWS2027B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2), the right-handed notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps 026IWS2028B and S634). . However, unlike the big hit game, the right-handed display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2).

  On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is made in the first special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. The lighting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right-handed display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  As described above, according to the feature portion 026IW, the first identification information (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). , The first special symbol) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting prize opening). The variable display can be executed. Further, variable means (for example, special variable prize winning) that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). Ball device 17). In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player and a special state (less advantageous than the advantageous state) For example, the variable means is controlled to the first state when the state is controlled to the special state. In addition, the first start area is provided so that a game medium moving along a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) among the movement paths through which the game medium can move, and the variable means can be A game medium that moves along a specific route (for example, a region to the right of the game region) is provided so as to be able to enter. Moreover, specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) for promoting the release of the game medium to the specific route can be executed, and variable display of the first identification information When the special state is controlled after the is executed, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 9-48 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of game media launch.

  Specifically, as shown in this feature 026IW, the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol side can be changed. Is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special prize opening is lower than the small specials type on the second special symbol side, and the second special when the variation display of the first special symbol is small If the symbol change display is forcibly disengaged and stopped, if a right-handed notification is executed for a small hit on the first special symbol side with a low winning rate (advantage), substantially, Although it is almost impossible to expect a special winning opening, the player will waste a game ball, which is not preferable because a disadvantageous launch promotion notification will be made. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage caused by a player's wasteful hitting and to realize appropriate notification.

  In addition, according to the feature unit 026IW, information relating to the variable display of the first identification information can be stored as a hold storage, for example, a first hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer), and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second on-hold storage means (for example, a second on-hold storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the on-hold storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of the first identification information or a variable result of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) is obtained. When the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information. It is controllable to a small hit gaming state). Moreover, it is controllable to the special state (for example, KT state) which raised the frequency that the display result of the variable display of 2nd identification information turns into a special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display. As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, off-symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be digested smoothly.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, paying out 10 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to a special prize opening), When controlled to the advantageous state, a value higher than a predetermined value can be given (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls to the big prize opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are more visible. The second specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48 (1)) can be executed.
When controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-48 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. The first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-48 (2)). Therefore, the notification corresponding to the value that can be given can be realized.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, it is more advantageous than the case where the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Control to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 9-48 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode between when controlled to a special state and when not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made) Forcibly, non-reach off symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the recognizability to the player with respect to being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed can be reduced. In addition, on-hold storage stored in the second on-hold storage means can be digested smoothly.

  In addition, according to the feature unit 026IW, the delay unit (for example, the restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable unit in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen countermeasures against the gaming machine.

  The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a path member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. May be.

  In addition, according to the feature unit 026IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game and the presentation based on the information from the game control means. Production control means for controlling (for example, production control CPU 120). Further, the game control unit controls the execution of notification by a notification unit (for example, a right-handed display 26) that performs predetermined notification. In addition, the production control unit performs specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification unit. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

  In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game regardless of whether the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus (left big prize opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball apparatus (right big prize opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If the symbol display is a big win, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big special is changing the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When it is applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. If a big hit is made, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Moreover, when comprised in this way, when it becomes a big hit by the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol, you may comprise so that a left-handed notification may be performed during a big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big prize opening) is controlled to the advantageous state of the type to be controlled. If comprised in that way, when it is a big hit by the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol, it will suppress that a player performs right-handed operation accidentally by performing a left-handed alert | report during a big hit game And the occurrence of a player's disadvantage can be suppressed.

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the gaming area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the short-time state. Also good.

  Further, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. Although the case where it does is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when the first fluctuation display after the big hit game is executed, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 026IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. May be configured to perform right-handed notification.

  In this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, apart from the relatively large size right-handed display 026IW007 as shown in FIG. 9-48 (1), a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangle display) indicating right-handedness is displayed on the image display device 5. Thus, a right-handed notification may be executed.

  Further, the manner of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning ports) to be opened are different depending on the type of small hit, and the first special symbol variation display indicates the small hit. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different between the case where the change is made and the case where the change is displayed in the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type that is opened by the special variable winning ball apparatus having a small number of winning balls (or the small hit type of the release mode with a low winning rate) is easily selected. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is easy to select a small hitting type (or a small hitting type having an open aspect with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device having a large number of winning balls opens. You may comprise.

  In this example, if a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-hand notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit has occurred, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48 (3)), but the small hit has occurred in the variation display of the second special symbol Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, in the situation where the left-handed operation should be performed in the normal state, when the small special hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. May be.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, and the special display result as the variable display display result. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Moreover, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to a non-specific state and when controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). -2). Therefore, appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability or type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability changes depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in the performance of the ball) may become too prominent depending on the setting value, and the gambling may be excessively high There is. Therefore, in this feature 026IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the common winning probability is small hit). In addition, it prevents the euphoria from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Moreover, it is controllable to the special state (for example, KT state) which raised the frequency that the display result of the variable display of 2nd identification information turns into a special display result (for example, small hit symbol). Therefore, appropriate gaming properties can be realized in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, as the special state, the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It can be controlled. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate gaming properties.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-47) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as a variable display result. When the displayed variable display is executed, a setting value suggesting effect (for example, a setting value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 9-46) that suggests a setting value can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

  In addition, although the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the fluctuation display that is out of place is shown in the present example, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or a set value suggestion effect may be executed during a big hit game or a small hit game, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Also, the special state type is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-4). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, by making the number of special type determination values common regardless of the set value (sharing the small hit type common), the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming large, and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the case where the allocation of the small hit types is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be varied depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  Further, according to this feature 026IW, it is possible to control in a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R probability variation per unit, 9R probability variation per unit, 6R probability variation per unit, 6R normal variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, 2R normal variation per unit). Further, the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a big hit type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the setting value by making the number of the advantageous type determination values common regardless of the setting value (sharing the jackpot type is common). To prevent excessively high euphoria.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the case where the allocation of the jackpot type is the same regardless of any of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be varied depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-8). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, by making the number of variable display mode determination values common regardless of the set value (sharing the variation pattern), the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming large, and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for factors other than the big hit lottery Although the degree (difference in the performance of balls) varies greatly, this feature 026IW does not cause such a problem by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value. ing.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, a case is shown in which the allocation of the variation pattern is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on which of the setting values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in variation time, the variation efficiency varies depending on the setting value. You may comprise so that a difference may come out in an advantage by a value.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, and the special display result as the variable display display result. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hits judgment) for deciding to derive and display a variable display, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of variable display And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation). Moreover, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in determination values corresponding to all the setting values, and the number of the predetermined determination values varies depending on the setting values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a certain variation state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in determination values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed). The variable display can be executed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is possible. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency with which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. In addition, a setting value suggesting effect (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 9-46) that suggests a set value when a variable display in which a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) is derived and displayed is executed under a special state. Value suggestion). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

  Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, and the special display result as the variable display display result. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Moreover, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game play.

  The feature unit 026IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to output a specific signal. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 describes that a big hit signal (specific signal) is output from an external output terminal during all big hit states.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506, whether it is a normal state or a special state, or whether a predetermined condition is satisfied by variable display of the first identification information, the second identification information No consideration is given to whether the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display. Accordingly, it is necessary to appropriately output a signal when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state.

  Therefore, in the feature unit 026IW, the following means (1) to (5) are provided to solve the problem of appropriately outputting a signal when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information. A configuration is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), A gaming machine that is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state, wherein the first identification information is variablely displayed. Variable display execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, which can execute variable display of the second identification information in parallel, 2 In the special symbol process (step S25B), the same processing as in steps S110A to S113A) and a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit symbol is derived) After an established state is established, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control micro) that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, the passage gate 41). A part that executes steps S115A to S118A of the first special symbol process (step S25A) in the computer 100, a part that executes the same processes as steps S115A to S118A in the second special symbol process (step S25B)), and a special Special state control means capable of controlling the state (for example, a part for executing steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, the second special symbol process (step S25B)) Same as steps S119A-S121A And a special state control means (for example, step 026IWS2208A in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which a game value in a special state is more easily given than the normal state. A part for executing S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, S2220B) and a specific signal output means capable of outputting a specific signal (for example, jackpot signal 1) (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control) Step S23 and step 026 IWS2017A, S2017B, S2503B), and the specific signal output means that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state A specific signal can be output on the basis (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), in the normal state, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed with the first special symbol. The specific signal is not output based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), the second signal is Even if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with a special symbol, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is not started). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output a signal when a predetermined condition is satisfied by variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific signal is a signal that can specify the control to the advantageous state (for example, jackpot signal 1), and the specific signal output means is predetermined by variable display of the second identification information in the normal state. When the condition is satisfied, a specific signal can be output based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (1), in the normal state, the second special symbol is used). When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big hit signal 1 may be started based on the passing of the game ball of the passing gate 41). According to such a configuration, it can be specified that the game machine is controlled in an advantageous state outside the gaming machine.

(Means 3) Special signal output means (for example, step S23 and step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a special signal (for example, jackpot signal 2) corresponding to the special state and the advantageous state in the means 1 or means 2. The special signal output means can output a special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is External output from the output terminal with the terminal number “05”, and the jackpot signal 2 is output from the output terminal with the terminal number “06”), and the output of the special signal is started at the same timing as the output start timing of the specific signal. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, in the normal state, the first special symbol is the same as the jackpot signal 1. The external output of the jackpot signal 2 is started based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, the jackpot signal 2 It may be configured to start external output). According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output a special signal.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the first area in which the game medium can enter in the advantageous state (for example, a big prize opening) and the second area in which the game medium can enter in the special state ( For example, a special signal output means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output a special signal (for example, a special winning port winning signal) corresponding to the entry of a game medium into the second area. The special signal output means can output a special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is It may be configured to output from the output terminal having the terminal number “05” and to output the special winning award winning signal from the output terminal having the terminal number “07”). According to such a configuration, the state of entry of the game medium into the second area can be monitored externally.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific signal output means is predetermined when the predetermined condition is established by the variable display of the first identification information and in the special state by the variable display of the second identification information. When the condition is satisfied, a specific signal can be output regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 (1) and (2), the first When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with a special symbol, external output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with two special symbols, the external output of the big hit signal 1 may be started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform signal output corresponding to the state during the game.

  Note that the configuration indicated by the feature portion 026IW can be combined with the configuration indicated by the feature portion 21TM as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the setting value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 026IW so that a setting value suggesting effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect can be executed. The right-handed notification may be executed.

[Explanation regarding feature 06TM]
Next, the feature part 06TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as described in [Description of the characteristic section 026IW], it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(Relationship between gaming state, design pattern and production mode)
First, each game state (low / non-KT state, low / first KT state, high / first KT state, and high / second KT state), and each effect design (decorative design, first small design, And the second small symbol) and the relationship between each effect mode (normal mode, time reduction mode, probability variation mode, and small hit RUSH mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, it is a symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed on the upper right part and the upper left part of the image display device 5, whether or not the special symbol is variably displayed, and the symbol indicating the display result of the special symbol Is called a small symbol. The small symbol variation display can be executed in parallel with the special symbol variation display, and the small symbol stop display can also be performed in parallel with the special symbol stop display. An area at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped is displayed from the left to the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the area in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 where the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed and stopped is displayed from the left to the second small symbol display area 5l2, The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

  The first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 and the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 are all smaller in display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, and the visibility of the second small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

  FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of decorative symbols and small symbols corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Here, there are a case where the decorative display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the display of the first special symbol and a case where the decorative display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the display of the second special symbol. The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol among the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol depends on the gaming state. In the following description, the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is referred to as the main symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not compatible with the decorative symbol. A special symbol is called a sub symbol.

  That is, the state in which the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol is the state in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1. The variable display of the first small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the second special symbol variation display is performed. This is a state where the variable display of two small symbols is executed.

  On the other hand, the state in which the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol is the state in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2. In response to the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the second small symbol is executed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 correspond to the first special symbol variation display. This is a state in which variable display of one small symbol is executed.

  As described above, as the gaming state in the present embodiment, the “low / non-KT state” (sometimes referred to as a normal state) corresponding to the low probability / low base state and the “low” corresponding to the low probability / high base state. There are "accuracy / first KT state", "high accuracy / first KT state" corresponding to the high accuracy high base state, and "high accuracy / second KT state" corresponding to the high accuracy low base state. When the gaming state is controlled to (i) the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) when controlled to high probability / first KT state, (iv) controlled to high probability / second KT state. In any case, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

  That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the case of (ii) to (iv), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, “Special Figure 1” in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and “Special Figure 2” in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

  FIG. 10-1 (1) shows the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on. Further, FIG. 10-1 (2) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image performed. Further, FIG. 10-1 (3) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image performed. Further, FIG. 10-1 (4) is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4), the first hold for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold indications 06TM010) in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. A display area 06TM011 is provided, and a second reserved display area 06TM021 for displaying the second reserved storage number (0 to 4 second reserved displays 06TM020) is provided in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. Yes. In the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, active display is information corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed and information corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol being executed. An active display area 06TM031 for displaying 06TM030 is provided.

  Further, a first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display area 06TM011). A second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 for displaying the second reserved memory number is provided in the right part of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 06TM021). As described above, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5c1, which display the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, A first small symbol display area 5r1 is provided, and a second small symbol display area 512, which displays a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, is displayed on the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. A display area 5c2 and a second small symbol display area 5r2 are provided.

  Here, the number of objects (round image) corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 corresponds to the second reserved memory number. A number of objects (round images) are displayed. In contrast, the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 displays the first reserved memory number as a numerical value, and the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 displays the second reserved memory number as a numerical value. The The display range of the object in the first hold display area 06TM011 is wider than the numerical display range in the first hold storage number special display area 06TM015, and the first hold display area 06TM011 has the first hold storage number in the first hold display area 06TM011. It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 06TM015. In addition, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 06TM021 is wider than the numerical display range in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 has the second reserved memory number. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the 2 reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

  In the first reserved display area 06TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the gaming state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state) )), The number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the gaming state is The object itself is not displayed when (ii) the low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) the high accuracy / first KT state, or (iv) the high accuracy / second KT state). Yes. In this way, in the first hold display area 06TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the gaming state. On the other hand, in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, the first reserved memory number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, the player can check the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 even in a gaming state in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011 (any of (ii) to (iv)), The first reserved memory number can be grasped.

  In the second reserved display area 06TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) The number of objects corresponding to the number of the second reserved memory is displayed, but the main symbol is the first symbol in the case of ()) high accuracy / first KT state and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state When one special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, when the gaming state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state)), the object itself is not displayed. Yes. In this manner, in the second hold display area 06TM021, an object corresponding to the second hold storage number is displayed according to the gaming state. On the other hand, the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 displays the second reserved memory number regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, the player can grasp the second reserved memory number by checking the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 even in the gaming state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. Can do.

  In addition, in the active display area 06TM031, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is the main symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed regardless of the gaming state, and becomes a sub symbol. The object corresponding to the change display of the special symbol is not displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 10-1 (1) shows a screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, a “sunny image” representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

  In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and the second reserved memory number is 2, the first special symbol which is the main symbol and the second symbol which is the sub-symbol are displayed. The special symbol variation display is simultaneously executed in parallel. In addition, “4” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, “2” is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025, and four first items are displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. A hold display 06TM010 is displayed. In addition, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1 and the first small symbol display area 5r1 are in a variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol), the second small symbol display area 5l2 In the second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed.

  The example shown in FIG. 10-1 (2) shows a screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time reduction mode. When the effect mode is the time reduction mode, a “cloudy image” representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

  In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol that is the sub symbol and the second symbol that is the main symbol The special symbol variation display is simultaneously executed in parallel. Further, “2” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, “4” is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025, and four second items are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. A hold display 06TM020 is displayed. In addition, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed. In the symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (3), the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state is shown. When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the probability changing mode. When the effect mode is the probability variation mode, a “rain image” representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

  In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol that is the sub symbol and the second symbol that is the main symbol The special symbol variation display is simultaneously executed in parallel. Further, “2” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, “4” is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025, and four second items are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. A hold display 06TM020 is displayed. In addition, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed. In the symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (4), the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state is shown. When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, a “typhoon image” representing a landscape of a typhoon including clouds, wind, and rain is displayed as a background image of a decorative pattern.

  In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol that is the sub symbol and the second symbol that is the main symbol The special symbol variation display is simultaneously executed in parallel. Further, “2” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, “4” is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025, and four second items are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. A hold display 06TM020 is displayed. In addition, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. In addition, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed. In the symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), when the gaming state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the second special symbol is the sub symbol, but the second small symbol display. In the areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, the second small symbol is displayed in a variable or stopped display (determined stop), so that the player displays that the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable or is stopped. It is possible to grasp that it is displayed (determined stop). As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (2) to (4), the gaming state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT. When the state is one of the states, the first special symbol is a sub-symbol, but the first small symbol is variably displayed or stopped (fixed stop) in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. Thus, the player can grasp that the first special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped (decision stopped). As described above, although the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, the player can check the variation status of the special symbol as the sub symbol according to the variation status of the small symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is varied depending on the gaming state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-1KT state (normal state), as shown in FIG. The display mode is controlled to the normal mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be a clear image based on a command for designating a corresponding background image to be displayed. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. The rendering mode is controlled to the short-time mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a cloudy image based on a command for specifying a background image corresponding to the state). Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. The rendering mode is controlled to the probability change mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the rain image based on the command that specifies to display the background image corresponding to the state. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. The effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be a typhoon image based on a command specifying a background image corresponding to the state).

(Game flow)
FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow of the present embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of presentation modes corresponding to the gaming state are provided, and the presentation control CPU 120 can control the presentation mode corresponding to the current gaming state among the plurality of presentation modes. It is.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state and the production mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is “16R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit” ”And“ 6R normal big hit ”, the big hit gaming state is controlled. When the result of the variable display is “16R probability variation big hit”, after the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. . When the result of the variable display is “6R probability variation big hit”, after the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. . If the result of the variable display is “6R normal big hit”, after the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the short time mode. . Therefore, when the big hit occurs in the normal state, the player pays particular attention to which type of big hit.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state and the display mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is “small hit” The game is controlled to the small hit gaming state. Then, after the small hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues. In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state and the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is “16R probability variable big hit” and When either of “2R probability variable big hit” is reached, the big hit gaming state is controlled. Then, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state and the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display becomes “9R positive change big hit”. In this case, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. After the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability changing mode. In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is “2R normal big hit”. When it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, after the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time reduction mode.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state and the production mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, the variation display is started, and the display results of the variation display are “16R probability variation big hit” and “2R probability variation big hit”. ”Is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state and the production mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, the variation display is started, and the display result of the variation display becomes “9R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. After the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability changing mode. That is, the probability variation mode continues.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, and the variable display is started when the production mode is controlled to the probability changing mode, and the display result of the variable display becomes “2R normal big hit” Is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, after the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time reduction mode.

  When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state and the production mode is controlled to the short time mode, the variable display is started, and the display results of the variable display are “16R probability variation big hit” and “2R probability variation big hit”. ”Is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state and the production mode is controlled to the short-time mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display becomes “9R probability variable big hit”. In this case, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. After the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability changing mode.

  When the game state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the variable display is started when the production mode is controlled to the short-time mode, and the display result of the variable display becomes “2R normal big hit” Is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, after the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time reduction mode.

  If the game state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state and the presentation mode is controlled to the short-time mode, and the big hit does not occur until the predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) is displayed. The gaming state shifts from the low probability / first KT state to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode shifts from the time reduction mode to the normal mode. In other words, after the game state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (after the production mode is controlled to the short-time mode), the special symbol variation is displayed a predetermined number of times (50 times) until the special symbol variation display ends. When the display result does not show any of the display results of “16R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, “9R probability variation big hit”, and “2R normal big hit”, the fluctuation of the predetermined number of times (50th) After the display is completed, the gaming state falls from the low probability / first KT state to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode falls from the time reduction mode to the normal mode.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, not only when the gaming state is controlled to (iv) high probability / second KT state (effect mode: small hit RUSH mode), i) When controlled to low accuracy / non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) When controlled to low accuracy / first KT state (production mode: time reduction mode), (iii) high accuracy / Also, when controlled to the first KT state (production mode: probability variation mode), a small hit occurs and the small hit gaming state can be controlled.

  However, in the present embodiment, in the non-KT state, the variation time of the second variation pattern in which the display result is “out of” and the variation time of the second variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” are set to 15 minutes. (See FIG. 9-6 (C)), it is practically difficult for the variable winning ball apparatus 6B to win a game ball. Further, as described above, in the first KT state, the variable baseball device 6B is controlled so as to have a long open time by being controlled to the high base state (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11). Even if a small hit occurs, the number of cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 on the downstream side is extremely small (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). That is, (i) low probability / non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) low probability / first KT state (production mode: time reduction mode), (iii) high probability / first KT state (production mode: probability change) In the mode), even if a small hit occurs, the frequency with which the game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is low.

  Therefore, in these gaming states (i) to (iii), the special symbol that is the main symbol (the first special symbol in the case of (i), the second special symbol in the case of (ii) or (iii)) When the display result of the game is a small hit symbol, the display pattern combination “135” suggesting that a small hit has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5 correspondingly. Is displayed without prompting the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 to win the game ball (displaying the characters “small hit!” At the top of the screen), and the game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 17. I try not to have too much expectation.

  On the other hand, (iv) in the high accuracy / second KT state (effect mode: small hit RUSH mode), the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened (FIG. 9). -9 to FIG. 9-11), when a small hit occurs, the frequency of game balls winning in the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 on the downstream side is high. Therefore, in the game state (iv), when the display result of the second special symbol which is the main symbol is a small hit symbol, it is suggested that a small hit has occurred in the image display device 5 correspondingly. The combination of decorative symbols “135” to be displayed is stopped (determination stopped) and the player is prompted to make the special variable winning ball device 17 win a game ball (“small hit!” At the top of the screen). Character display) is performed so that the game ball has a sense of expectation to win the special variable winning ball apparatus 17.

  Thus, (i) low probability / non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) low probability / first KT state (production mode: time-short mode), (iii) high probability / first KT state (production mode) : Probability mode), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that a small hit has occurred (the display result of the special symbol that is the main symbol has become a small hit symbol) (Iv) In the high-accuracy / second KT state (direction mode: small hit RUSH mode), a small hit has occurred (the display result of the special symbol that is the main symbol is a small hit symbol) The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (determination stopped) in such a manner that the player can easily recognize that

  As described above, in the first KT state among the KT states, although the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long, so Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). That is, in the 1st KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and also controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is increased. Also, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, when the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. That is, in the 2nd KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball apparatus 6B will be in the open state per normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the ratio determined as a small hit when the first special symbol changes is low, whereas it is determined as a small hit when the second special symbol changes. Since the ratio is configured to be high (except for the case of the above-mentioned forced off), the KT state is a gaming state that is likely to have a smaller hit than the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to the KT state, a gaming state that is different from the big hit gaming state can be realized as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the first special symbol normal process in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where neither the first big hit game (special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the first small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sets the second special symbol process flag value to the second big hit release pre-processing (5), the second big hit hit. Medium processing (6), second big hit opening post-processing (7), second big hit winning end processing (8), second small hit pre-opening processing (9), second small hitting open processing (10), And it is confirmed whether it is a value corresponding to one of the processes of the second small hit end process (11) (step S06TM1000A). The value of the second special symbol process flag is the second big hit pre-release process (5), the second big hit big open process (6), the second big hit big post-open process (7), and the second big hit big end process (8), In addition, when the value corresponds to one of the second small hit hit pre-processing (9), the second small hit open process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) ( In step S06TM1000A, YES), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, the values of the second special symbol process flag are the second big hit pre-release process (5), the second big hit open process (6), the second big hit post-open process (7), and the second big hit end process (8). ), And the second small hit pre-opening process (9), the second small hit opening process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) are not supported. In that case (NO in step S06TM1000A), the same processing as the processing after step 026IWS51A shown in FIG. 9-14 is executed.

  In the process of step 026IWS52A described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control CPU 120. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the process of step 026IWS52A, the CPU 103 The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the CPU 120 and an effect control command for designating the background display corresponding to the current gaming state (low / non-KT background designation command, high / second KT background designation command, high Any one of the certain / first KT background designation command and the low certain / first KT background designation command) may be transmitted.

  As described above, in step S06TM1000A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the period is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol. If the period is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the symbol variation display result (YES), the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value indicating the first special symbol normal process. By not updating (0) to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started.

  If the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, the first special symbol started. The control when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “small hit” becomes a problem, and game control becomes complicated. As in this embodiment, during the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, by not starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, The game state is controlled appropriately. In addition, when the player is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state, small hit game state) based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, by not starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, The player is concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

  In addition, the second special symbol normal process in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart of the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process is a state where the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol. In addition, neither the second big hit game (special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the second small hit game (special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened).

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sets the first special symbol process flag value to the first big hit release pre-processing (5), the first big hit release. The middle processing (6), the first big hit opening post-processing (7), the first big hit winning end processing (8), the first small hit pre-opening processing (9), the first small hitting open processing (10), And it is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any one of the first small hit end processing (11) (step S06TM1000B). The value of the first special symbol process flag is the first big hit pre-release process (5), the first big hit big open process (6), the first big hit big post-open process (7), and the first big hit big end process (8), In addition, when the value corresponds to any one of the first small hit pre-opening process (9), the first small hit hit releasing process (10), and the first small hit end process (11) ( In step S06TM1000B, YES), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, the value of the first special symbol process flag is the first big hit release pre-processing (5), the first big hit big open process (6), the first big hit big post-open process (7), and the first big hit big end process (8 ), And the first small hit pre-opening process (9), the first small hitting open process (10), and the first small hit end process (11) are not supported. In that case (NO in step S06TM1000B), the same process as the process after step 026IWS51B shown in FIG. 9-22 is executed.

  In the process of step 026IWS52B described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control CPU 120. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the process of step 026IWS52B, the CPU 103 Second CPU waiting demonstration display designation command and production control command for designating background display corresponding to the current gaming state (low / non-KT background designation command, high / second KT background designation command, high Any one of the certain / first KT background designation command and the low certain / first KT background designation command) may be transmitted.

  As described above, in step S06TM1000B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a period controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol. If the period is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the symbol variation display result (YES), the value of the second special symbol process flag is set to a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. By not updating (0) to the value (1) indicating the second variation pattern setting process, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started.

  If the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, the started second special symbol is started. The control when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “small hit” becomes a problem, and game control becomes complicated. As in this embodiment, during the period controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the first special symbol variation display result, by not starting the variation display of the second special symbol, The gaming state is controlled appropriately. In addition, when the player is controlled to be in a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state, small hit game state) based on the first special symbol variation display result, the second special symbol variation display is not started. The player is concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, if the first reserved memory number is 0 in the first special symbol normal process (YES in step 026IWS51A), the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is used for effect control. It transmits to CPU120 (step 026IWS52A). As shown in FIG. 10-4, if the second reserved memory number is 0 in the second special symbol normal process (YES in step 026IWS51B), a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. (Step 026IWS52B).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the CPU 120 for effect control receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the gaming state is (i) the low probability / non-KT state (normally State), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started (the first reserved memory number remains 0), and the big hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is not started When the first demonstration standby timer times out, the image display device 5 starts the first demonstration display described later. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not controlled to (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state) ((ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) When the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received (when controlled to either the high accuracy / second KT state), the first demonstration display is not started.

  In the first demonstration display, a push button 31B is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 with a sunny image as a background image corresponding to the current gaming state ((i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state)) as a background. The operation promotion display 06TM050 prompting the user to operate and the characters “Menu” are displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation promotion display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume adjustment bar and a light amount adjustment bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. The volume and light quantity can be adjusted by operating 31B.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the gaming state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) ) High accuracy / first KT state and (iv) High accuracy / second KT state, and the second special symbol variation display is not started (the second reserved memory number is 0) If the second demonstration standby timer times out while the gaming state is continued, the image display device 5 starts the second demonstration display described later. Note that any game state of (ii) to (iv) ends when the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is started to temporarily shift to the low probability / low base state. Will do. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not controlled to any of the gaming states (ii) to (iv) ((i) when controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state)), the second When the customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received, the second demonstration display is not started.

  In the second demonstration display, the background corresponding to the current gaming state (any one of (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT state)) With the image (any one of a cloudy image, a rain image, and a typhoon image) as a background, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and “ The text “Menu” is displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation promotion display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume adjustment bar and a light amount adjustment bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. The volume and light quantity can be adjusted by operating 31B.

  As described above, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 0 in the first special symbol normal process, and the second reserved memory in the second special symbol normal process. Based on the fact that the number is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted. That is, the CPU 103 transmits a different customer waiting command to the effect control CPU 120 depending on the special symbol. As a result, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, a customer waiting command corresponding to the current gaming state, that is, (i) if the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, (ii) Only when a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received if any one of () low accuracy / first KT state, (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy / second KT state). The demo display can be started, and the demo display can be started at an appropriate timing according to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in both the first demonstration display and the second demonstration display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “Menu” are displayed at the lower right portion of the screen, and the gaming state is displayed. Except for the different production parts (background images), a common production mode is adopted when the first demonstration display is performed and when the second demonstration display is performed. Not only in such a form, but also in the first display and the second demonstration display, it may be possible to vary the production mode other than the production portion (background image) that differs depending on the gaming state.

  For example, in the first demonstration display that is executed when the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is received, an object to be displayed in the demonstration display at the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the “menu”). In the second demo display executed when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received, an object (in this example, an operation displayed in the demo display at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5) is displayed. You may make it display the promotion display 06TM050 and the character "menu"). According to such a configuration, in each gaming state, the object is displayed in the hold display area corresponding to the special symbol that is the main symbol (for example, in the normal state, the object corresponds to the first special symbol that is the main symbol). When the object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 and is in the high accuracy / second KT state, the object is displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021 corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) It becomes easier for the player to recognize the current gaming state and the main symbol.

  The display colors of the objects to be displayed may be different between the first demonstration display and the second demonstration display. For example, in the first demonstration display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” are displayed in blue. In the second demonstration display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” may be displayed in red. Further, the object itself (object shape) to be displayed may be different between the first demonstration display and the second demonstration display. For example, in the first demonstration display, the push button 31B is an image imitating the push button 31B. The operation promotion display 06TM050 prompting the user to operate 31B may be displayed, and the second demonstration display may be an image imitating the stick controller 31A and the operation promotion display 06TM050 prompting the user to operate the stick controller 31A may be displayed.

(Starting prize in the demonstration display)
Next, when the first demo display is executed after the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the small hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. With reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, an example of the effect when the game medium starts and wins the winning ball apparatus 6A while being controlled in the gaming state will be described. FIG. 10-5 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demonstration display and the start winning, and FIG. 10-6 shows an example of the effect image related to the first demonstration display and the start winning. It is explanatory drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, “sunny image” is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first demonstration display on the image display device 5 and displays the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025. “0” is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that when the display of the variation display of the first special symbol executed last time (the most recently executed) is “out of”, the variation display is confirmed and stopped. The decorative symbol (2, 4, 7) is continuously displayed in the symbol display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demonstration display, and the small symbol (2, 4) when the variable display is confirmed and stopped. , 7) are continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

  On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to the end of the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol being executed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 (1, 3, 5) Confirm and stop. That is, the combination of the second small symbols is confirmed and stopped in response to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being “small hit”, and controlled to the small hit gaming state (FIG. 10). T1 timing shown in -5). Here, since the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, based on the variation display of the second special symbol as will be described later. Even if it is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the first demonstration display is continuously executed without ending.

  Next, when the first demonstration display is continuously executed during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display of the second special symbol, a new start prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A. It is assumed that the first reserved storage number is 1 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-5). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the first reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 displays “1” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved memory number has increased.

  At this time, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning determination process in the first special symbol process, and executes the first special symbol normal process in step S110A (see FIG. 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the second special symbol variation display result, the value of the second special symbol process flag is set to the second small symbol process flag. Since it is a value corresponding to any one of the process before opening the hit (9), the second small hit opening process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process. In other words, even if a start winning to the first starting winning opening (winning ball apparatus 6A) occurs, the change display of the first special symbol is not started. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any one of the second small hit pre-release process (9), the second small hit open process (10), and the second small hit end process (11). (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag changes from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value indicating the first variation pattern setting process (1). ) And the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714 based on the fact that the first special symbol variation display has not started, and plays the small hit gaming state (second special game state). Since it is determined NO in step 026IWS4715 based on being controlled to the small hit game state based on the symbol variation display result), the first demo display is not terminated (step 026IWS4716 is not executed), and as a result The first demonstration display is continuously executed. In other words, the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol continues even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs without ending the first demonstration display. And execute.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation display of the second special symbol. (When the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the first special symbol variation display is not started, and whether or not the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied Regardless of whether or not (a winning at the first start winning opening has occurred), the execution of the first demonstration display is continued. Even if the first special symbol variation display is not started because it is controlled to the small hit game state, the first demonstration display is immediately ended according to the winning at the first start winning opening. In this case, the player feels uncomfortable that the decorative symbol variation display is not started even though the demonstration display is completed. For this reason, in such a state, the first demonstration display is not terminated even if a winning to the first start winning opening occurs, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the state of the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, when the first demonstration display is being executed, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state (the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol), the first start winning opening is entered. When the winning prize is generated, the CPU 120 for effect control controls a command related to the small hit gaming state such as a small hit start specifying command and a set of commands corresponding to the winning at the first start winning opening (for example, symbol specifying command, change Category command and first reserved memory number addition designation command) are received continuously in a short period of time. If an effect corresponding to each command is to be executed in a short time in such a situation, the effect control is complicated, and the processing load on the effect control CPU 120 is excessively increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is being executed, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state (the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol), 1 Even if a winning at the start winning a prize occurs, the already displayed demonstration display is continued and the notice effect corresponding to the new starting winning prize is not executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the effect control. Like to do.

  In the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed, the value of the first special symbol process flag is the first during the period in which the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol. The value (0) indicating the special symbol normal process is not updated to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process, and the process does not proceed to the process after the first special symbol normal process in the first special symbol process process. As a result, the number of commands transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced, and the processing load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

  In addition, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation start condition cannot be satisfied, but a new start winning to the winning ball device 6A is newly established. When this occurs, the CPU 103 executes a first start winning determination process in step S101A. In the first start winning determination process, a process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold memory number is executed, and a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern Is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. After storing the hold information and the first reserved memory number, transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the first reserved memory number, and the prefetch determination on the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set thus transmitted is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  Receiving the command indicating that the first reserved memory number has increased, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. As described above, when the first special symbol variation start condition cannot be established, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first special symbol variation display is not executed, but the first hold By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning port has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the object (round image) is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 even though the first hold storage number is changed from “0” to “1”. ) Is not displayed. That is, among the display areas in which the first reserved memory number can be displayed, the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility is not displayed with the first reserved memory number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number). The first reserved memory number is displayed only in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 having low visibility.

  If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to a winning at the first start winning opening, the player immediately displays a variable display of decorative symbols based on the first hold memory ( Expected to be executed (variable display corresponding to the first special symbol that is the main symbol), but in the state that is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display Even though the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the decorative pattern change display is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Accordingly, the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility does not display the first reserved memory number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number), and the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility. By displaying the first reserved memory number only on the screen, the updated first reserved memory number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), when the small hit gaming state is terminated and the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the first special symbol variation start condition is established. That is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any one of the second small hit pre-release process (9), the second small hit open process (10), and the second small hit end process (11). When the value no longer corresponds to the process (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-5).

  At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 9-38), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demonstration display (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are not displayed. On the other hand, a sunny image that is a background image corresponding to the current gaming state ((i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state)) is continuously displayed. Thus, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 having higher display priority than the background image (appears to be displayed in front of the background image) and “menu "Is not displayed, but the background image has a lower display priority than the first demo display (it appears to be displayed behind the operation-promoting display 06TM050 and" menu "characters). Will be displayed. Accordingly, the player can start the display before the change display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is started (when the first demo display is displayed) and after (the first It is possible to easily grasp that the gaming state has not changed after 1 demo display is hidden.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol as the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1 and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let it begin. In addition, when the first reserved memory number becomes 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031. . The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the hold storage based on the winning to the first start winning opening that occurs when the first demonstration display is being executed. As the first demonstration display ends, the first hold display area 06TM011 has a number of first hold displays 06TM010 corresponding to the number of the first hold storage (the first display generated when the first demo display is being executed). 1) information corresponding to the hold storage based on the winning at the 1st start winning award will be displayed.

  As described above, the variation start condition for the first special symbol is satisfied in response to the end of the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In response, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demonstration display. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when the second demo display is executed, the second demo display is not ended even when the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is controlled. It has been continued. Then, when the second demonstration display is executed, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs within the period controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. At this time, the second demonstration display continues without ending, and the object (round image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021.

  Specifically, when the second demonstration display is executed (the gaming state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT state). When the game state is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “9” to “9”. 11 ”based on the fact that it is determined as YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4 and the value of the second special symbol process flag does not correspond to the second variation pattern setting process, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. And, when a winning to the second start winning opening occurs in this state (a period in which the second demo display is executed and controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol), In step S9-39, step 026IWS4814 is determined to be NO, and step 026IWS4815 is determined to be YES, step 026IWS4816 is not executed, and the second demonstration display is not terminated.

  Here, the CPU 120 for effect control that has received the command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased, updates the value of the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. To do. However, the object (round image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 even though the second reserved storage number is changed from “0” to “1”. That is, among the display areas that can display the second reserved memory number, the second reserved memory area (number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number) is not displayed in the highly visible second reserved display area 06TM021. The second reserved memory number is displayed only in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 with low visibility.

  Thereafter, the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is finished, and the gaming state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability. / When the game state is controlled to any one of the second KT states, the first special symbol process flag value is released based on the fact that the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, ie, the first special symbol process flag is released. When the value corresponding to any of the pre-processing (9), the first small hit opening process (10), and the first small hit end processing (11) is lost (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 The variation display of the second special symbol is started. At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 9-39), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are not displayed. On the other hand, a background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current gaming state (any one of (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT state)) Any one of an image, a rain image, and a typhoon image) is continuously displayed.

  Thus, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 having a higher display priority than the background image (appears to be displayed in front of the background image) and “menu "Is not displayed, but the background image has a lower display priority than the second demonstration display (it appears to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the" menu "characters). Will be displayed. As a result, the player can start the display before the change display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol as the main symbol) is started (when the second demo display is displayed) and after (the second 2) After the demo display is hidden, it is possible to easily grasp that the gaming state has not changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol as the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let it begin. In addition, when the second reserved memory number becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 displays “0” in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031. . The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the on-hold storage based on winning in the second start winning opening that occurred when the second demonstration display is being executed. In addition, as the second demonstration display ends, the second hold display area 06TM021 has a number of second hold displays 06TM020 corresponding to the number of the second hold storage (the second display displayed when the second demo display is being executed). 2) information corresponding to the on-hold storage based on the winning at the starting winning opening is displayed.

(Special symbol change interruption process with small hit game state)
In this embodiment, during the variable display of one special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the other special symbol, The special symbol variation display is temporarily interrupted, and then when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the other special symbol is finished, the variation display of one special symbol is resumed. Hereinafter, a specific symbol variation interruption process and a variation resumption process associated with the occurrence of a small hit will be specifically described.

    FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first determines, if not yet transmitted, any display result designation command (display result) based on the determination result as to whether or not the jackpot is determined and the determination result of the jackpot type. 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200A). If the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200A), the process proceeds to step 026IWS1121A and the subsequent processes. If the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200A), the process ends. The first variation interruption flag is set when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

  If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step 026IWS1124A), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210A). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S06TM1220A).

  If the big special symbol display device 4B has not derived and displayed the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B has derived and displayed the small bonus symbol (step S06TM1220A). Whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set.

  If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 sets the first fluctuation interruption flag (step S06TM1230A) and ends the processing as it is.

  If the small bonus symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (NO in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 corresponds the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A). The value is updated (step 026IWS1127A), and the process is terminated as it is.

  By executing the processing of step S06TM1200A, step S06TM1220A, and step S06TM1230A, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, The first variation symbol is set, the first variation time timer is not subtracted (step 026IWS1121A), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the first special symbol variation process. The change display is interrupted.

  In addition, when the process of step 026IWS1124A is executed, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol in the feature unit 06TM, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation where a big hit occurs simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is not forced, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120A. As a result, control is performed to forcibly discontinue and display the symbols.

    FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process (step S112B) in the second special symbol process. In the second special symbol variation process, first, if not yet transmitted, the CPU 103 determines one of the display result designation commands (display result) based on the determination result as to whether or not to win the jackpot and the determination result of the jackpot type. 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120B).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second variation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200B). If the second fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200B), the process proceeds to the process after step 026IWS1121B. If the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200B), the process is ended as it is. The second variation interruption flag is set when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 decrements the second variation time timer by 1 (step 026IWS1121B), and when the second variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122B), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B) (step 026IWS1127B).

  If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS1124B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set.

  If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to CPU 120 for effect control (step S06TM1210B). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step S06TM1220B).

  If the first special symbol display device 4A has not derived and displayed the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A has derived and displayed the small bonus symbol (step S06TM1220B). Whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set.

  If the small bonus symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 sets the second fluctuation interruption flag (step S06TM1230B) and ends the processing as it is.

  If the small bonus symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (NO in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 corresponds the value of the second special symbol process flag to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B). The value is updated (step 026IWS1127B), and the process is terminated as it is.

  By performing the processing of step S06TM1200B, step S06TM1220B, and step S06TM1230B, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, The second variation symbol is set, the second variation time timer is not subtracted (step 026IWS1121B), and the value of the second special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the second special symbol variation process. The change display is interrupted.

  In addition, when the process of step 026IWS1124B is executed, if the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol in the feature unit 06TM, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is forcibly stopped to prevent a situation where a big hit occurs simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly discontinued, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120B. As a result, control is performed to forcibly discontinue and display the symbols.

  FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart illustrating the first small hit end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process. In the first small hitting end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hitting end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A). If the small hitting end display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304A. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and if the second fluctuation interruption flag is set, the second fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300A). Then, control for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303A). finish.

  In step 026IWS2304A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305A), CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

  FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing a second small hit end process in the second special symbol process. In the second small hitting end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hitting end display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B). If the small hitting end display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and if the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300B). Then, control for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303B). finish.

  In step 026IWS2304B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305B), CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special time flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 026IWS2307B) and to the effect control CPU 120 to the right Control is performed to transmit a strike lighting end designation command (step 026IWS2308B).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2309B).

  By executing the process of step S06TM1300A, in the feature part 06TM, when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol ends, the second variation interruption flag is reset, as shown in FIG. 10-8. As described above, when it is determined NO in step S06TM1200B, the suspended display of the suspended second special symbol is resumed. Similarly, when the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol is completed, the first variation interruption flag is reset, and as shown in FIG. 10-7, it is determined NO in step S06TM1200A. The variable display of the suspended first special symbol is resumed.

  Next, after the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) or the low probability / first KT state (short time mode), the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes “small hit”. An example of effects in the case of being controlled to the small hit gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12.

  FIG. 10-11 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurs when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A5) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to the small hits that are generated when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). It is. FIG. 10-11 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurred when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (short time mode), FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to the small hits that are generated when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (time reduction mode). .

[Small hit in small hit RUSH mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, the “typhoon image” is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second symbol of the image display device 5 are executed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is performed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. In the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed (shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)). The timing of T1).

  Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. The active display area 06TM031 displays an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display, and the second hold display area 06TM021 displays four second hold displays 06TM020.

  When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), the image display device 5 displays the small hit consecutive number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. At the same time, a small hitting continuous medium winning ball number display 1 indicating the number of winning balls generated in the second KT state in which the small hitting is continuously generated is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after 16R probability variation big hit occurs and shift to the second KT state, small hits have occurred nine times so far, and as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), A case where a character such as “9th” is displayed as the number display 1 is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 16 rounds = 2400 prize balls are obtained during the big hit game based on the first 16R probability variation big hit, and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each subsequent small hit. 10-12 (A1) based on the fact that 30 × 9 = 270 prize balls were obtained by the occurrence of 9 small hits, resulting in a total of 2670 prize balls. As shown in the figure, a case where a character such as “2670 pt” is displayed as the small winning consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “1” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C, and The decorative symbol “5” is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol “1” is displayed in the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2. “3” and the second small symbol “5” in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixedly stopped (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-11). That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol whose variation display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” is confirmed and stopped, and the small hit gaming state is controlled. Further, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by displaying the characters “small hit !!” on the upper part of the image display device 5. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit consecutive number display 1 to “10th” because the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  Next, during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is open (period T2-T3 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)), FIG. 10-12 (A3 ), The effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second hold display 06TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021, and displays the image. The device 5 displays the character and the line “Opening small hit attacker!”.

  Next, during the period when the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of winning balls is further increased by 10 × 3 balls = 30 to reach 2700 in total. Shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), the CPU 120 for effect control is a period from the closing of the special variable winning ball device 17 to the end of the small hit gaming state (FIG. 10-11 (A)). In the small hitting ending period from T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 4B, the character and the line of “30 pt GET !!” are displayed on the image display device 5 and the small winning consecutive medium winning ball number display 1 is updated to “2700 pt”. . In this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) is 3 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A5), when the gaming state is controlled from the small hit gaming state to the high probability / second KT state and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 In the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the second small symbol display area 5l2 and second small symbol of the image display device 5 are started. In the display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is started (timing T4 shown in FIGS. 10-11).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second hold display 06TM020 in the second hold display area 06TM021 when the second hold memory number becomes 3. One shift is made to the display area 06TM031 side, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the combination of the second small symbols for which the variation display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” is determined and stopped, the CPU 103 performs the second special symbol in the first special symbol variation process. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (YES in step S06TM1220A), the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1230A), and the process is ended as it is. Then, in step S06TM1200A of the first special symbol variation process thereafter, based on the fact that the first variation interruption flag is set, the processing after step 026IWS1121A is not executed, and the processing is terminated as it is (YES in step S06TM1200A). ). That is, during the period when the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the first fluctuation timer is not subtracted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted.

  When the small hit gaming state ends, the CPU 103 executes the processing after step 026IWS2301A based on the fact that the small hit end display timer is not operating in the second small hit end processing, and the first variation interruption is performed in step S06TM1300A. The first fluctuation interruption flag is reset when the flag is set.

  Since the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the processes after 026IWS1121A based on the fact that the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set in step S06TM1200A in the first special symbol fluctuation processing ( In step S06TM1200A, NO). That is, when the first variation interruption flag is reset, the first variation timer is subtracted, and thus the variation display of the first special symbol is resumed.

  Accordingly, during the second KT state, regarding the first special symbol variation display, the period from the timing at which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state to the timing at which the small hit gaming state ends (in FIG. 10-11 (A)). In the period of T2 to T4 shown), the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily interrupted, and at the timing when the small hit gaming state ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)), The variable display of the first special symbol is resumed. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) is the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit gaming state is controlled ( In the period from time T2 to time T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the variable display of the first special symbol has been suspended. Is extended (from the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) to the timing of T6) by the period (period T2-T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A)).

[Small hits in short-time mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time reduction RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the time reduction mode, the “cloudy image” is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second symbol of the image display device 5 are executed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is performed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. In the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol as the sub symbol) is executed (shown in FIG. 10-6 (B)). 1 of timing).

  Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 06TM031 displays an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the currently executed variable display, and the second hold display area 06TM021 displays four second hold displays 06TM020.

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), in the image display device 5, the small hits continuous number display 1 and the small hits continuous middle prize shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1). The ball number display 1 is not displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (1) to 9-11 (1), in the first KT state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 on the downstream side is 0.2 seconds, 0.8 The opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds, whereas it is as short as 2 seconds or 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the 1st KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 variations display), The number display 1 and the small winning consecutive medium number of winning balls display 1 are not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “1” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C, and The decorative symbol “5” is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol “1” is displayed in the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2. “3” and the second small symbol “5” are confirmed and stopped in the second small symbol display area 5r2 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-6 (B)). That is, the combination of the second small symbols for which the display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” is fixedly stopped, and the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is controlled to the first KT state, even if a small hit occurs, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a special winning opening. Even if the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, it is not necessary to notify the player that a small hit has occurred. Therefore, in the first KT state, when the display result of the second special symbol is “small hit”, the combination of the second small symbols whose decorative display result and the variation display result of the second small symbol are “small hit” (In this example, “135” or the like) has been confirmed and stopped, but the letters “small hits !!” are not displayed above the decorative symbols that have been confirmed and stopped. That is, unlike the 2nd KT state in which the player is informed in a manner that the player can easily grasp the occurrence of the small hit by displaying the characters “small hit! By not displaying characters such as “small hit !!” during the state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the occurrence of the small hit. According to such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” during the first KT state, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that a small hit has occurred, and the first KT Even if a small hit occurs during the state, the player is not expected to have excessive expectations.

  Next, in a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is open (period T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)), FIG. 10-12 (B3) As shown in the figure, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “1” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5R. In the state in which “5” is confirmed and stopped, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second hold displays 06TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021 are erased. In this example, the small hitting ending period as the small hitting end processing period in the first KT state is set to 0.5 seconds.

  Next, when the gaming state is controlled from the small hit gaming state to the low probability / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B4), the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area of the image display device 5 are started. In 5r2, the variation display of the second small symbol is started (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)).

  Here, the production control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second hold display 06TM020 in the second hold display area 06TM021 when the second hold memory number becomes 3. One shift is made to the display area 06TM031 side, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

  Further, as described above, even during the first KT state, the period from the timing at which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state to the timing at which the small hit gaming state ends (FIG. 10) with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In the period from T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 11 (B), the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily interrupted, and at the timing when the small hit gaming state ends (shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)). At the timing of T4), the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is the original timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit gaming state is controlled ( In the period from time T2 to time T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended during the display period of the first special symbol. Is extended (from the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) to the timing of T6) by the period (period T2-T4 shown in FIG. 10-11 (B)).

  In this way, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win a special winning opening in the small winning game state, so an effect (character display of “small winning !!”) that emphasizes the small winning control is executed. Instead, the small hitting ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win a special winning opening in the small hit game state, so that an effect that emphasizes the small hit control (character display of “small hit!”) Is executed, The small hitting ending period is made longer than that in the 1KT state. In this example, the small hitting ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hitting ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state.

  As described above, when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is “small hit” during the variation display of the first special symbol, and the controlled state is the small hit gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. Interrupted. The small hitting ending period in the first KT state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the small hitting ending period in the second KT state is 3 seconds. Here, when the same type of small hit occurs in the first KT state and the second KT state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is common (for example, in the case of the small hit B, 0.8 seconds). Therefore, in the second KT state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted for [0.8 seconds + 3 seconds = 3.8 seconds], while in the first KT state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted. Interrupt for [0.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds = 1.3 seconds].

  As described above, in the first KT state in which the degree of expectation for winning a special winning opening is low, the interruption time of the variable display can be made shorter than in the second KT state in which the degree of expectation for winning a special winning opening is high. If, in the first KT state, a common hitting ending period is provided in the second KT state, the effect of emphasizing the small hitting control is not executed, and the first special is in spite of the low degree of expectation for winning a special winning opening. Due to the long period (for example, 3.8 seconds) during which the variation display of the symbol is interrupted, there is a large inconsistency between the variation display time of the first special symbol and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. This will give the player a sense of incongruity. As in the present embodiment, by setting the small hitting ending period in the first KT state to be shorter than the small hitting ending period in the second KT state, the first special symbol variable display time in the first KT state and the first It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by suppressing the inconsistency with the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol.

(Production control when a big hit occurs)
Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously in parallel, the effect control when the variation display result of any of the special symbols is “big hit” This will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-13 and 10-14.

  In FIG. 10-13 (A), the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the first special symbol becomes “big hit”, so that the second special symbol It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production | presentation when a display result is forced to be "disappearance". Further, in FIGS. 10-14 (A1) to (A4), the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the first special symbol becomes “big hit”. FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the display result of the second special symbol is forcibly “out”.

  In addition, in FIG. 10-13 (B), the game state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the second special symbol becomes “big hit”, so that the first special It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production | presentation when the display result of a symbol becomes "displacement" compulsorily. Further, in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4), the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the second special symbol becomes “big hit”. FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the display result of the first special symbol is forcibly “out”.

(When the second special symbol is forced off)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, “sunny image” is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In response to this, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the second small symbol (sub symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5. In the state in which the variable display of the information corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, the decorative symbol (main symbol) is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1 and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of information corresponding to a certain first special symbol is started. The change display of 1 small symbol is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13 (A)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on the first reserved memory number being 0 and the second reserved memory number being 0. Is displayed, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025. An active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach a reach state, and the character “reach!” Is displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T2 in FIG. 10-13 (A)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The first small symbols are continuously displayed without being stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body operation effect that moves the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the standing position while continuing the reach state, and the movable body. An effect effect is displayed in which the flame effect image 06TM150 is superimposed and displayed around the 06TM100 (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-13 (A)). Since the flame effect image 06TM150 is an image having a display priority higher than that of the background image and the decorative design (the display layer is higher), the player seems to be displayed in front of the background image and the decorative design. appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation of returning the movable body 06TM100 in the standing position to the tilted position (T4 shown in FIG. 10-13 (A)). As a result, the movable body motion effect ends, and the decorative symbol “2” is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol “2” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol “2” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R. Confirmation is stopped, the first small symbol “2” in the first small symbol display area 511, the first small symbol “2” in the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 5r1. The symbol “2” is confirmed and stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the first small symbol whose display result of the first special symbol is “big hit” is confirmed and stopped. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the letters “big hit !!” on the upper part of the image display device 5.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 described above, in the second special symbol variation process, if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), it is for effect control. Control is performed to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 (step S06TM1210B), and control is performed so that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not forced. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the CPU 120 for effect control that has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command displays the second small symbol “7”, the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 5l2. “8” of the second small symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5c2 and “2” of the second small symbol is stopped in the second small symbol display area 5r2. That is, the combination of the second small symbols for which the display result of the second special symbol is “out of” is confirmed and stopped.

(If the first special symbol is forced off)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, “sunny image” is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In response to this, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the second small symbol (sub symbol) in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5. In the state where the variable display of the information corresponding to the second special symbol is executed, the decorative symbol (main symbol) is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the information corresponding to a certain first special symbol is started. The change display of one small symbol is started (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-13 (B)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on the first reserved memory number being 0 and the second reserved memory number being 0. ”And“ 0 ”is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025. In addition, an active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach a reach state, and the character “reach!” Is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing T2 in FIG. 10-13 (B)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The first small symbols are continuously displayed without being stopped.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B3), at a timing at which a blackout effect to be described later in the variation pattern of the second special symbol should be executed (T3 shown in FIG. 10-13 (B)). The blackout effect is executed in the image display device 5. The blackout effect in the present embodiment is to display the dark image 06TM200 as a covering image that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed, so that the background image and the decorative design are in a difficult-to-view state.

  Here, due to the blackout effect, the decorative symbols are in a visually difficult state, but the first small symbols and the second small symbols remain visible. That is, the visibility of the decorative symbol “2” that has been stopped in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C are reduced, while the first small The first small symbol displayed in the symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, In addition, the visibility of the second small symbols that are variably displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2 is not lowered.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), the production control CPU 120 is at the timing when the display result of the second special symbol that has been subjected to the variable display becomes “big hit” (FIG. 10-13 (B)). The occurrence of a big hit is notified by displaying the characters “FEVER” in the central portion (symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5 at the timing T4 shown in FIG. The second small symbol “7” is displayed in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol “7” is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2. Confirm and stop “7”. That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol whose display result of the second special symbol is “big hit” is confirmed and stopped.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 described above, if the big special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B in the first special symbol variation process (YES in step 026IWS1124A), it is for effect control. Control is performed to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 (step S06TM1210A), and the variation display of the first special symbol is controlled to be out of force. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), the CPU 120 for effect control that has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command displays the first small symbol “2”, the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 5l1. The symbol display area 5c1 confirms and stops the first small symbol “4” and the first small symbol “7” in the first small symbol display area 5r1. That is, the combination of the first small symbols for which the display result of the first special symbol is “out” is fixedly stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is “big hit”, the combination of the decorative symbols that are big hit (in this example, “222”) ) Is stopped, and when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol not corresponding to the decorative symbol is “big hit” as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), The occurrence of a big hit is informed by displaying the characters “FEVER” without executing the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of decorative symbols. Temporarily, the special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol is switched from one special symbol to the other special symbol in the middle of the variable display (for example, the first special symbol is switched to the second special symbol). If it is executed, it is unclear which special symbol is displayed, and the player may misunderstand. Therefore, when the display result of variable display of special symbols (sub-symbols) that do not correspond to the decorative symbol is a big hit, the display result of any special symbol is not executed by executing the effect of displaying the combination of the decorative symbols that are the big hit. It is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying whether it is a big hit.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A3) and (A4), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol is “big hit”, the movable body 06TM100 is tilted. While the movable body motion effect that moves from the position to the standing position is executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the variation of the second special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol When the display result of the display is “big hit”, the movable body motion effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, an irregular timing unexpected by the player who is paying attention to the decorative symbol variation display (in this example, the first symbol which is the sub symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol). 2) When the movable body motion effect is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation display result is “big hit”, it is possible to prevent the interest of the highly expected movable body motion effect from decreasing. .

(Process when recovering from a power failure)
Next, a process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from a power-off will be specifically described. In this embodiment, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after the power is turned off, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 designates that the power has been restored from the power-off in the process of command transmission (step S7) at the time of restoration in the game control main process (designates to display the restoration screen). The 1 designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command and the second reserved memory number designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. If at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed when the power is turned off, in addition to the above command, a display for designating the display result of the variably displayed special symbol being executed A result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control.

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes processing up to interrupt permission (step S12) in the game control main processing, the CPU 103 enters a loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  Then, in the command control process (step S27) in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 stores data indicating the game situation at the time of power-off backed up in the RAM 102 (game state, fluctuation status of the first special symbol, and A set of commands corresponding to the second special symbol variation status, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 within one interrupt. These commands include a customer waiting demonstration designation command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating the first customer waiting state or the second customer waiting state, and the gaming state. Background designation command (low accuracy / non-KT background designation command, low accuracy / first KT background designation command, high accuracy / first KT background designation command, high accuracy / second KT background designation command) and design Final designation commands (first symbol final designation command, second symbol final designation command) and the like are included.

  In the following description, the restoration screen displayed on the image display device 5 includes (1) a restoration image corresponding to the main symbol, (2) a restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration). The symbol, the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image are superimposed and displayed. Among these images (1) to (3), the image with the highest display priority (the image that appears to be displayed in the forefront) is (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority. The image with the second highest image (the image that appears to be displayed behind (3) behind (1)) is the restored image corresponding to (2) sub-symbol and has the highest display priority. The lower images (images that appear to be displayed at the farthest) are (3) each effect design and background image.

  When receiving the power failure restoration 1 designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes display control of both (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol. . In the present embodiment, the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is an image in which the characters “currently recovering from power failure” are displayed on the entire screen. Therefore, when the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed (2) The restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is lower than the display priority. As a result, the recovery screen is displayed with the characters “currently recovering from power failure” displayed on the entire screen (similar to the situation 2 and the situation 6 shown in FIG. 10-18 described later).

  FIG. 10-15 shows an example of a command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 when the power is restored from the power-off. As described above, these commands are the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the first reserved memory number designation command and the second reserved memory number designation command, and the display result designation command and the second special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. It is sent in the interrupt process after sending the display result designation command corresponding to. In addition, in FIG. 10-15, although the typical situation is shown as a fluctuation situation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is cut off, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is cut off. As a situation, commands corresponding to other situations can be transmitted.

  “Situation 1” in FIG. 10-15 shows the situation when the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state and the first special symbol is in the first customer waiting state as the fluctuation state at the time of power-off. Yes. In the case of “Situation 1”, the CPU 103 performs the following in the order of the background designation command → second customer waiting demonstration display designation command → background designation command → first customer waiting demonstration display designation command in the same interrupt processing when the power is restored. Each command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines the gaming state when the power is turned off ((i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state), (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / second state. 1KT state, (iv) high accuracy / second KT state) can be specified. The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the first reserved memory number at the time of power-off is 0, and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is the second reserved memory at the time of power-off. Sent based on the number being zero.

  “Situation 2” in FIG. 10-15 shows that the second special symbol is waiting for the second customer, the first special symbol is in a variable display, and the remaining time for the variable display is 8 ms. The situation when it is above is shown. In the case of “situation 2”, the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of the background designation command → the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command within the same interrupt processing when the power is restored.

  “Situation 3” in FIG. 10-15 indicates that the second special symbol is waiting for the second customer, the first special symbol is in a variable display, and the remaining time of the variable display is 4 ms as a fluctuation state at the time of power-off. Shows the situation when. In the case of “situation 3”, the CPU 103 uses the command for effect control in the order of background designation command → second customer waiting demonstration display designation command → first symbol confirmation designation command in the same interrupt processing when power is restored. It transmits to CPU120. Based on the reception of the background designation command and the first special symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 120 confirms and stops the decoration symbol and the first small symbol when the first special symbol is the main symbol. When the first special symbol is a sub symbol, the first small symbol is confirmed and stopped.

  “Situation 4” in FIG. 10-15 shows that the second special symbol is in the variable display and the remaining time of the variable display is 8 ms or more as the fluctuation state at the time of power-off, and the first special symbol is waiting for the first customer. It shows the situation when it is in a state. In the case of “situation 4”, the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of the background designation command → the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command within the same interrupt processing when the power is restored.

  “Situation 5” in FIG. 10-15 shows that the second special symbol is in a variable display and the remaining time of the variable display is 4 ms as the fluctuation state at the time of power-off, and the first special symbol is in a waiting state for the first customer. Shows the situation when. In the case of “Situation 5”, the CPU 103 uses the same interrupt process at the time of power restoration to direct each command in the order of the second symbol confirmation designation command → background designation command → first customer waiting demonstration display designation command. It transmits to CPU120.

  “Situation 6” in FIG. 10-15 indicates that the second special symbol is in a variable display and the remaining time of the variable display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is in a variable display as the fluctuation state at the time of power-off. The situation is shown when there is a variable display remaining time of 8 ms or more. In the case of “situation 6”, the CPU 103 does not transmit a command to the effect control CPU 120 in the interrupt process when the power is restored.

(Recovery screen)
FIG. 10-15 shows an example of a restoration screen displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is restored. The effect control CPU 120 can display different modes of recovery screens according to the above-described game situations of “situation 1” to “situation 6”. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, the gaming state at the time of power interruption is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second symbol. This is an example of a special symbol.

  In the case of “situation 1”, the production control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and then turns off the power. It can be specified that the gaming state at the time of occurrence is the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variation display of the main symbol is not executed and the variation display of the sub symbol is not executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed and (2 ) The display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is not executed, and (3) only the display control of each effect design (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image is executed.

  That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a “sunny image” as the background image of the decorative design, and the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are separated from the decorative design at the time of restoration (in this example, "247") is displayed, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5 are displayed with the off symbol ("247" in this example) as the first small symbol at the time of restoration, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the device 5, the off symbol ("152" in this example) is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, and based on the second reserved memory number being 0, the second reserved memory number is displayed. “0” is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

  In the case of “Situation 2”, the effect control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the gaming state at the time of power-off is low / non-probable. It is possible to specify that the state is the KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, since the change display of the main symbol is executed and the change display of the sub symbol is not executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is executed, and (2) the sub symbol is displayed. The display control of the restoration image corresponding to the symbol is not executed, and (3) the display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and the background image is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of the execution, the display priority is high and displayed over the entire screen. (1) Only the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed on the screen. That is, the characters “power supply is being restored” are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

  In the case of “situation 3”, the production control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the first symbol designation confirmation designation command. It can be specified that the gaming state at the time of occurrence is the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, it is the timing at which the main symbol is fixedly stopped (ie, the decorative symbol in the state of fixed stop and the first small symbol in the state of fixed stop may be displayed), and the sub-pattern variation display is not executed Therefore, (1) the restoration image display control corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, (2) the restoration image display control corresponding to the sub symbol is not executed, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration) Only the display control of the symbol, the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image is executed.

  In other words, the effect control CPU 120 displays a “sunny image” as the background image of the decorative design, and the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are out of the state of being confirmed and stopped as the decorative design at the time of restoration. A symbol (in this example, “247”) is displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the off symbol (in this example) is confirmed and stopped as the first small symbol at the time of restoration. “247”) is displayed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 is caused to display the off symbol (“152” in this example) as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, and based on the second reserved memory number being 0, the second reserved memory number is displayed. “0” is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

  In the case of “situation 4”, the effect control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command and the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the gaming state at the time of power-off is low / non-probable. It is possible to specify that the state is the KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variation display of the main symbol is not executed and the variation display of the sub symbol is being executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2 ) The display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is executed, and (3) the display control of each effect design (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the image with the higher display priority is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, but (2) the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is the sub-symbol display range (in the case of the first small symbol) Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, and in the case of the second small symbol, the upper right part of the screen). (2) Excluding the part of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen), The design symbol (decorative symbol and first small symbol) and the background image can be visually recognized. As a result, “Recovering” is displayed in the display range of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen, which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each effect symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decoration design and first small design) and the background image are displayed.

  In the case of “situation 5”, the effect control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designation command, the low probability / non-KT background designation command, and the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and when the power interruption occurs It is possible to specify that the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, since the main symbol variation display is not executed and it is the timing for finalizing and stopping the sub symbol (that is, the timing when the second small symbol in the finalized state may be displayed), (1) the main symbol is displayed. (2) The restoration image display control corresponding to the sub-symbol is not executed, and (3) Each effect design (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) is not executed. Only the display control of the symbol) and the background image is executed.

  That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a “sunny image” as the background image of the decorative design, and the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are separated from the decorative design at the time of restoration (in this example, "247") is displayed, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5 are displayed with the off symbol ("247" in this example) as the first small symbol at the time of restoration. In the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the device 5, the off symbol ("152" in this example) in a state of being confirmed and stopped is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, and based on the second reserved memory number being 0, the second reserved memory number is displayed. “0” is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

  In the case of “situation 6”, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command, and therefore cannot specify the gaming state at the time of power interruption, and the main symbol and sub symbol. Therefore, based on the reception of the power failure recovery 1 designation command, display control of both (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) a restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is being executed. As described above, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority (2) are displayed in a superimposed manner. The text “Recovering from power failure” is displayed throughout.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state when the power interruption occurs, but when the power interruption occurs, the gaming state is high probability / If the KT state is controlled to any one of the second KT state, the high probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT state, a background designation command corresponding to each KT state is transmitted. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the background designation command can specify that the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol, together with the gaming state (which KT state it is) It is.

  For example, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol as the main symbol is not executed, and the variation display of the first special symbol as the sub symbol is executed. In the case where the power is cut off in this state, it corresponds to the case shown in “Situation 2” in FIG. In this case, the CPU 120 for effect control (1) does not execute display control of the restored image corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol, and (2) the restored image corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol. Display control is executed, and (3) display control of each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) display control of each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the image with the higher display priority is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, but (2) the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is the sub-symbol display range (in the case of the first small symbol) Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, and in the case of the second small symbol, the upper right part of the screen). (2) Excluding the portion of the restored image corresponding to the sub-design (in this example, the upper left part of the screen), (3) Each effect The design symbol (decorative symbol and second small symbol) and the background image (typhoon image in this example) can be visually recognized. As a result, “Restoring” is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper left of the screen, which is the display range of the first small symbol), and each effect symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and second small design) and a background image are displayed.

  As described above, when the CPU 103 recovers from the power interruption, the game state when the power interruption occurs, the change status of the first special symbol, and the change status of the second special symbol can be specified. The set can be transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control that has received the set of commands differs according to the gaming state specified based on the set of commands, and the variation status of the first special symbol and the variation status of the second special symbol. A mode recovery screen can be displayed. According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine that can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, it is possible to perform appropriate notification regarding the power-off recovery.

(Specific example of recovery screen in situation 6)
Next, as shown in the “situation 6” described above, a specific example of a case where a power interruption occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel. Will be described. In this example, when the power interruption occurs, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state) (that is, the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol). Yes), the first reserved memory number is 0, and the second reserved memory number is 0. As described above, in the “situation 6”, the effect control CPU 120 receives (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration corresponding to the sub symbol based on the reception of the power failure restoration 1 designation command. This is a state in which display control of both images is being executed. As described above, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority (2) are displayed in a superimposed manner. The text “Recovering from power failure” is displayed throughout.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), after recovering from a power interruption, the first special symbol that was being executed when the power interruption occurred and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power interruption occurred. When the variable display of the first special symbol is finished before the variable display of the second special symbol when the variable display is executed in parallel, the CPU 103 determines that the first reserved memory number is 0. Then, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10-3).

  Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 (1) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each production. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command has been received. The display control of the restored image is continued. Therefore, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, “Recovering” is displayed in the display range of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen, which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each effect symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

  Here, when the first reserved memory number is 1 or more at the time of the power interruption, the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol being executed at the time of the power interruption after the recovery from the power interruption. Thereafter, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variation pattern command and the background designation command are transmitted (FIG. 10). -3, step 026IWS56A, and FIG. 9-15, step 026IWS1704A). Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 (1) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, The second small pattern) and the background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. As a result, “Recovering” is displayed in the display range of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen, which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each effect symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), after recovering from a power interruption, the first special symbol that was being executed when the power interruption occurred and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power interruption occurred. When the variable display of the second special symbol is finished before the variable display of the first special symbol when the variable display is executed in parallel, the CPU 103 determines that the second reserved memory number is 0. Then, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B in FIG. 10-4).

  Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) for each production. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command has been received. (1) Corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image is continued. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. Then, (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and a display priority lower than this (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) As a result of superimposing and displaying a clear image), the recovery screen is displayed with the characters “currently recovering from power failure” displayed on the entire screen.

  Here, when the second reserved memory number is 1 or more at the time of power-off occurrence, the CPU 103 has ended the variable display of the second special symbol being executed at the time of power-off after the recovery from the power-off. Thereafter, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the next variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation pattern command and the background designation command are transmitted (FIG. 10). -4, step 026IWS56B, etc.). Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 (2) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, The second small pattern) and the background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. Then, (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and a display priority lower than this (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) As a result of superimposing and displaying a clear image), the recovery screen is displayed with the characters “currently recovering from power failure” displayed on the entire screen.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16 (C), after the recovery from the power interruption, the change display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power interruption occurred and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power interruption occurred. When the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol are finished when the change display is executed in parallel, the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second hold memory number is also 0. Therefore, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10-3). , Step 026IWS52B in FIG. 10-4).

  The effect control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, and receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command. (1) Recovery corresponding to the main symbol The image display control is terminated, (2) the restoration image display control corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (Sunny image in this example) is displayed. As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the restoration image display control corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image display control corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration symbol, Only the first small symbol and the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example) can be displayed.

  Here, when the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 1 or more when the power interruption occurs, the CPU 103 displays the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display. Is finished, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but the next variable display of the first special symbol and the next When starting the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol (Step 026IWS56A in FIG. 10-3, Step 026IWS1704A in FIG. 9-15, Step 026IWS in FIG. 10-4) 6B, etc.).

  The effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command and background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. (1) End the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (2) End the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) Each design symbol (decorative symbol, first A small symbol, a second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the restoration image display control corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image display control corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration symbol, Only the first small symbol and the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example) can be displayed.

  Based on the fact that the first reserved memory number was 0 and the second reserved memory number was 1 or more when the power interruption occurred, the first customer waiting demo corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol after the power supply was restored. When the display designation command, the background designation command, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands: (1) the main symbol And (2) finish the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) ) And a background image (sunny image in this example). As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the restoration image display control corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image display control corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration symbol, Only the first small symbol and the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example) can be displayed.

  In addition, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 1 or more and the second reserved memory number is 0 when the power interruption occurs, the fluctuation pattern command and the background corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol after the power supply is restored When the designation command and the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands: (1) the main symbol And (2) finish the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) ) And a background image (sunny image in this example). As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) the restoration image display control corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image display control corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each effect symbol (decoration symbol, Only the first small symbol and the second small symbol) and the background image (sunny image in this example) can be displayed.

  FIG. 10-17 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in the case where a power failure occurs in the low probability / non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-17, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (main symbol: first special symbol, sub symbol: second special symbol). 2 Assume that a power interruption has occurred when the variable symbols are displayed in parallel (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-17). At this time, the first reserved memory number is 0, and the second reserved memory number is 0.

  When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 performs the power failure recovery 1 designation command and the first reserved memory number in the process of command transmission at the time of recovery in the game control main process (step S7). The designation command, the second reserved memory number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this (2) are displayed in a superimposed manner. The text “Recovering” is displayed.

  Also, as shown in “Situation 6” in FIG. 10-15, even after interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Because the command set is not sent, the text “Recovering from power failure” is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-17).

  Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 (1) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each production. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command has been received. The display control of the restored image is continued. Therefore, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, “Recovering” is displayed in the display range of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen, which is the display range of the second small symbol), and each effect symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

  Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 determines that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. The effect control CPU 120 ends the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (2) based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

  FIG. 10-18 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in the case where a power failure occurs in the low probability / non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-18, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (main symbol: first special symbol, sub symbol: second special symbol). It is assumed that a power interruption has occurred when the variable display of two special symbols is executed in parallel (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-18). At this time, the first reserved memory number is 0, and the second reserved memory number is 0.

  When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 performs a power failure recovery 1 designation command, the first reserved memory number in the process of command transmission at the time of recovery in the game control main process (step S7). The designation command, the second reserved memory number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this (2) are displayed in a superimposed manner. The text “Recovering” is displayed.

  Also, as shown in “Situation 6” in FIG. 10-15, even after interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Because the command set is not sent, the text “Recovering from power failure” is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-18).

  Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 determines that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) for each production. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command has been received. (1) Corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image is continued. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the characters “Now recovering from power failure” are still displayed on the entire screen.

  Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. The effect control CPU 120 (1) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (sunny image in this example) are displayed.

  FIGS. 10-19 is a figure which shows the example of a screen transition when a power failure generate | occur | produces in a high probability / 2nd KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-19, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol). 2 Assume that a power interruption has occurred when the variable symbols are displayed in parallel (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-19). At this time, the first reserved memory number is 0, and the second reserved memory number is 0.

  When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 performs the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the first reserved memory number in the command transmission processing (step S7) at the time of recovery in the game control main process. The designation command, the second reserved memory number designation command, the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this (2) are displayed in a superimposed manner. The text “Recovering” is displayed.

  Also, as shown in “Situation 6” in FIG. 10-15, even after interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Because the command set is not sent, the text “Recovering from power failure” is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-19).

  Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-19), based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 determines the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 (1) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each production. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, for the first special symbol, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command has been received. The display control of the restored image is continued. Therefore, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example, a typhoon image) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, “Restoring” is displayed in the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper left of the screen, which is the display range of the first small symbol), and each effect symbol is displayed in the other parts. (Decorative design and second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

  Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demo display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. The effect control CPU 120 ends the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (2) based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

  FIG. 10-20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the screen transition when the power interruption occurs in the high-accuracy / second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol). 2 Assume that a power interruption has occurred when the variable symbols are displayed in parallel (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-20). At this time, the first reserved memory number is 0, and the second reserved memory number is 0.

  When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 performs a power failure recovery 1 designation command and a first reserved memory number in the process of command transmission at the time of recovery in the game control main process (step S7). A designation command, a second reserved memory number designation command, a display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, and a display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this (2) are displayed in a superimposed manner. The text “Recovering” is displayed.

  Also, as shown in “Situation 6” in FIG. 10-15, even after interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Because the command set is not sent, the text “Recovering from power failure” is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is interrupted due to the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-20).

  Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 (2) terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) for each production. A symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command has been received. (1) Corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image is continued. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are superimposed and displayed. It will be. As a result, the characters “Now recovering from power failure” are still displayed on the entire screen.

  Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 determines that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. The effect control CPU 120 terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command. As a result, (3) only each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

  As described above, when a power interruption occurs in a situation where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the game when the power interruption occurs The recovery screen can be displayed in a different manner depending on the state and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to notify the restoration process in an appropriate manner according to the fluctuation display situation of the main symbol and the fluctuation display situation of the sub-symbol.

(Modification example when a start prize occurs during the demonstration display)
In the above-described example, when the first demo display is executed, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol (the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9 to 11), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (a winning to the first start winning opening has occurred) The first demonstration display continues to run regardless of whether or not. Not only in such a form, but when the first demo display is executed, the start condition of the first special symbol is controlled when the small hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol. Once established, the first demonstration display may be immediately terminated. 10-21 and FIG. 10-22 are flowcharts showing a modification of the demonstration display control process.

  The processing of step 026IWS 4701 to step 026IWS 4714 shown in FIG. 10-21 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started in step 026IWS4714. When the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is 0 (step 06TM1400). When the first reserved storage number is 0 (YES in step 06TM1400), the processing after step 026IWS4715 shown in FIG. 9-38 is executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit gaming state has been started based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol (step 026IWS4715), and if the big hit gaming state has been started (YES in step 026IWS4715), the first demonstration display Is terminated (step 026IWS4716), and if the big hit gaming state is not started (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demonstration display is continued.

  On the other hand, when the first reserved memory number is not 0 (NO in step 06TM1400), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demonstration display (026IWS4716). That is, when the first demonstration display is executed, the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied regardless of whether or not the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol. Immediately terminate the first demonstration display.

  The processing of step 026IWS4801 to step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 10-22 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is started in step 026IWS4814. When the variation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 06TM1500). When the second reserved storage number is 0 (YES in step 06TM1500), the processing after step 026IWS4815 shown in FIG. 9-39 is executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is controlled to the KT state (step 026IWS4815), and if it is controlled to the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demonstration display should be continued and controlled to the KT state. If this is the case (NO in step 026IWS4815), the second demonstration display is terminated (step 026IWS4816). That is, when the second demo display is executed, the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied regardless of whether or not the small hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol. Immediately terminate the first demonstration display.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not started. In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39 described above, even in the demonstration display control processing, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started. The execution of the first demo display is continued, and even if the start winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs, the second special symbol variation display is not started, so the second demo display is continued to be executed. On the other hand, in this modified example, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIGS. 10-21, When a start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs and the first reserved memory number becomes 1 (NO in step 06TM1400), the first demonstration display is immediately terminated. Also, in this modification, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the variable special icon display is not started, as shown in FIG. 10-22. When the start winning for the ball device 6B occurs and the second reserved memory number becomes 1 (YES in Step 06TM1500), the second demonstration display is immediately terminated.

  Next, when the first demo display is executed after the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the small hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. With reference to FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, an example of the effect in the case where the game medium starts and wins the winning ball apparatus 6A while being controlled in the gaming state will be described. FIG. 10-23 is a modification of the time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demonstration display and the start winning. FIG. 10-24 shows the effect image related to the first demo display and the start winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows a modification.

  As shown in FIG. 10-23 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, “sunny image” is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first demonstration display on the image display device 5 and displays the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025. “0” is displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that when the display of the variation display of the first special symbol executed last time (the most recently executed) is “out of”, the variation display is confirmed and stopped. The decorative symbol (2, 4, 7) is continuously displayed in the symbol display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demonstration display, and the small symbol (2, 4) when the variable display is confirmed and stopped. , 7) are continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

  On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to the end of the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol being executed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 (1, 3, 5) Confirm and stop. That is, in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being “small hit”, the combination of the second small symbols is fixed and stopped, and the small hit gaming state is controlled (FIG. 10). T1 timing shown in -23). Here, since the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, based on the variation display of the second special symbol as will be described later. Even if it is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the first demonstration display is continuously executed without ending.

  Next, when the first demonstration display is continuously executed during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display of the second special symbol, a new start prize is generated for the winning ball device 6A. It is assumed that the first reserved storage number is 1 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-23). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that the first reserved memory number has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 displays “1” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved memory number has increased.

  At this time, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning determination process in the first special symbol process, and executes the first special symbol normal process in step S110A (see FIG. 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the second special symbol variation display result, the value of the second special symbol process flag is set to the second small symbol process flag. Since it is a value corresponding to any one of the process before opening the hit (9), the second small hit opening process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process. In other words, even if a start winning to the first starting winning opening (winning ball apparatus 6A) occurs, the change display of the first special symbol is not started. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any one of the second small hit pre-release process (9), the second small hit open process (10), and the second small hit end process (11). (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag changes from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value indicating the first variation pattern setting process (1). ) And the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-21, the CPU 120 for effect control determines NO in step 026IWS4714 based on the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and if the first reserved memory number is 0 The first demonstration display is terminated by determining NO in step 06TM1400 based on the absence (the command indicating that the first pending storage number has increased) (step 026IWS4716 is executed). . That is, when the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs in the period controlled to the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the first demonstration display is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), the small hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation display of the second special symbol. (When the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the start condition of the first special symbol is set regardless of whether or not the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The first demonstration display is terminated in response to the establishment (the winning to the first start winning opening has occurred). Even if the variation display of the first special symbol is not started by being controlled to the small hit game state, the execution of the first demonstration display is continued according to the winning at the first start winning opening. If this happens, the player will be mistaken for the invalidity of the winning at the first start winning opening. For this reason, in such a state, the first demonstration display is terminated when a winning to the first start winning opening occurs, thereby suppressing the occurrence of misidentification of the player. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate performance control corresponding to the state of the variable display of the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10-24 (2), based on the fact that the first reserved memory count is 1 (NO in step S06TM1400 shown in FIG. 10-21), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first demonstration display. Terminate (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are not displayed. On the other hand, a sunny image that is a background image corresponding to the current gaming state ((i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state)) is continuously displayed. As described above, when the first reserved storage number is no longer 0, the operation promotion display 06TM050 having a higher display priority than the background image (appears to be displayed in front of the background image) 06TM050 and “Menu” However, the background image itself has a lower display priority than the first demonstration display (it appears to be displayed behind the characters of the operation promotion display 06TM050 and “Menu”). Will be displayed. As a result, the game state of the player before and after the first demo display ends (when the first demo display is displayed) and after (after the first demo display disappears) It is possible to easily grasp that it has not changed.

  In addition, during the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation start condition cannot be satisfied, but a new start winning to the winning ball device 6A is newly established. When this occurs, the CPU 103 executes a first start winning determination process in step S101A. In the first start winning determination process, a process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold memory number is executed, and a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern Is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. After storing the hold information and the first reserved memory number, transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the first reserved memory number, and the prefetch determination on the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set thus transmitted is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  Receiving the command indicating that the first reserved memory number has increased, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. As described above, when the first special symbol variation start condition cannot be established, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first special symbol variation display is not executed, but the first hold By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning port has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (2), the object (round image) is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 even though the first hold storage number is changed from “0” to “1”. ) Is not displayed. That is, among the display areas in which the first reserved memory number can be displayed, the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility is not displayed with the first reserved memory number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number). The first reserved memory number is displayed only in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 having low visibility.

  If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to a winning at the first start winning opening, the player immediately displays a variable display of decorative symbols based on the first hold memory ( Expected to be executed (variable display corresponding to the first special symbol that is the main symbol), but in the state that is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display Even though the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the decorative pattern change display is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Accordingly, the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility does not display the first reserved memory number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number), and the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility. By displaying the first reserved memory number only on the screen, the updated first reserved memory number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (3), when the small hit gaming state is ended and the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / non-KT state, the first special symbol variation start condition is established. That is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any one of the second small hit pre-release process (9), the second small hit open process (10), and the second small hit end process (11). When the value no longer corresponds to the process (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts displaying the first special symbol variation (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-23).

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol as the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1 and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let it begin. In addition, when the first reserved memory number becomes 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031. .

  In the present embodiment, when the second demo display is executed, the second demo display is not ended even when the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is controlled. It has been continued. Then, when the second demonstration display is executed, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs within the period controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. Also at this time, the second demonstration display ends, and the object (round image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021.

  Specifically, when the second demonstration display is executed (the gaming state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT state). When the game state is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “9” to “9”. 11 ”based on the fact that it is determined as YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4 and the value of the second special symbol process flag does not correspond to the second variation pattern setting process, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. And, when a winning to the second start winning opening occurs in this state (a period in which the second demo display is executed and controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol), In step 10-22, NO is determined in step 026IWS4814, and further, NO is determined in step S06TM1500. Then, step 026IWS4816 is executed, and the second demonstration display ends.

  At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1 (NO in step S06TM1500 shown in FIG. 10-22), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 are not displayed. On the other hand, a background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current gaming state (any one of (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT state)) Any one of an image, a rain image, and a typhoon image) is continuously displayed.

  In this way, with the second reserved memory number being 1, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and “Menu” having higher display priority than the background image (appears to be displayed in front of the background image). However, the background image itself has a lower display priority than the second demonstration display (it appears to be displayed behind the characters of the operation promotion display 06TM050 and “Menu”). Will be displayed. As a result, the player can start the display before the change display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol as the main symbol) is started (when the second demo display is displayed) and after (the second 2) After the demo display is hidden, it is possible to easily grasp that the gaming state has not changed.

  Here, the CPU 120 for effect control that has received the command indicating that the second reserved memory number has increased, updates the value of the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. To do. However, the object (round image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 even though the second reserved storage number is changed from “0” to “1”. That is, among the display areas that can display the second reserved memory number, the second reserved memory area (number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number) is not displayed in the highly visible second reserved display area 06TM021. The second reserved memory number is displayed only in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 with low visibility.

  Thereafter, the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is finished, and the gaming state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / When the game state is controlled to any one of the second KT states, based on the fact that the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, that is, the value of the first special symbol process flag is before the first small hit release. When the value corresponding to any one of the process (9), the first small hit opening process (10), and the first small hit end process (11) is lost (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 Start the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol as the main symbol) in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let it begin. In addition, when the second reserved memory number becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 displays “0” in the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031. .

  (1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the first gate passage waiting process in the first special symbol process (first special symbol process flag: 4), the first big hit pre-release process (first Special symbol process flag: 5), first big hit opening process (first special symbol process flag: 6), first big hit bonus post-processing (first special symbol process flag: 7), first big hit big end processing (first Special symbol process flag: 8), 1st small hit pre-release processing (first special symbol process flag: 9), 1st small hit opening process (first special symbol process flag: 10), and 1st small hit end Processing (first special symbol process flag: 11), second gate passage waiting processing in the second special symbol process (second special symbol process flag: 4), second big hit pre-release processing (second special symbol process) Lug: 5), 2nd big hit opening process (2nd special symbol process flag: 6), 2nd big hit after release (2nd special symbol process flag: 7), 2nd big hit end processing (2nd special symbol process) Flag: 8), second small hitting pre-processing (second special symbol process flag: 9), second small hitting release processing (second special symbol process flag: 10), and second small hitting end processing (second An example in which 2 special symbol process flags: 11) are provided individually has been described.

  That is, the processing (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) in the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol The example in which the processing (second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) in the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the above has been described. Not only in such a form, the processing (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) in the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, The processing (second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) in the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the variation display result of the special symbol is shared (that is, the CPU 103 executes a common program) You may do it.

  Specifically, a common gate passage waiting process is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 4 and when the second special symbol process flag is 4, and when the first special symbol process flag is 5 and The common big hit release pre-processing is executed when the 2 special symbol process flag is 5, and the common big hit release processing is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 6 and the second special symbol process flag is 6. Is executed, a common big hit release post-processing is executed when the first special symbol process flag is 7 and the second special symbol process flag is 7, and the second special symbol process flag is 8 and A common big hit end process is executed when the special symbol process flag is 8, and a common small hit release is performed when the first special symbol process flag is 9 and when the second special symbol process flag is 9. When the first special symbol process flag is 10 and the second special symbol process flag is 10, the common small hit release process is executed, and the first special symbol process flag is 11. A common small hit end process may be executed when the second special symbol process flag is 11. As described above, the processing related to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state depends on whether the processing is based on the variation display result of the first special symbol or the variation display result of the second special symbol. You may make it share a program.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the state of waiting for a gate to pass after the big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped (the state before the big hit is started and the first special symbol process flag is “4” or the second special symbol process flag is In the case of “4”), a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state may be executed. That is, when the game ball does not pass through the passing gate 41 even after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped (when the game ball is not detected by the gate switch 21), When the state is (i) low probability / non-KT state, the first demonstration display is executed, and the game state is (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high The second demonstration display may be executed when in either the certain / second KT state.

  As described above, in the waiting state for passing the gate, even if a winning at the first starting prize opening occurs, the display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize is not started, and the winning at the second starting prize opening is not made. Even if it occurs, the change display of the second special symbol based on the start winning is not started. When the demonstration control CPU 120 is executing the demonstration display in the gate waiting state, the demonstration control CPU 120 executes the demonstration display (first display) in response to occurrence of winning at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. (1 demo display or 2nd demo display) and ending the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41 (for example, “pass the gate to start the big hit” or “right hit”) Notification for displaying characters on the image display device 5) may be executed. That is, regardless of the gaming state (regardless of whether the first demonstration display is being executed or the second demonstration display is being executed), it is executed in response to the game ball having won the first start winning opening. The demonstration display being executed may be terminated and the demonstration display being executed may be terminated in response to the game ball having won the second start winning opening. Thus, even in the gate passage waiting state, appropriate control regarding the demonstration display can be realized according to the establishment condition of the start condition.

  It should be noted that the demonstration display being executed may be continued when a start prize is generated during the demonstration display in the gate waiting state. For example, when a start prize (a prize at the first start prize opening or a prize at the second start prize opening) occurs during a demonstration display in a gate waiting state, the game ball is not terminated without ending the demonstration display being executed. You may make it continue until it passes the passage gate 41 (until a big hit start effect is started). Further, when a start winning occurs during the demonstration display in the gate waiting state, the ongoing demonstration display may be continued according to the gaming state at that time. For example, the gaming state is (i) In the case of the low probability / non-KT state (during the first demonstration display), the first demonstration display is terminated when the first start winning opening is generated, but the second starting winning opening is generated. Even if the first demonstration display is not ended, the gaming state is any one of (ii) low probability / first KT state, (iii) high probability / first KT state, and (iv) high probability / second KT state. In the case (during the second demonstration display), the second demonstration display is terminated when a winning at the second start winning opening occurs, but the second demonstration display is displayed even when a winning at the first starting winning opening occurs. It may not be terminated.

  (3-1) In addition, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during execution of the demonstration display (first demonstration display, second demo display), the start condition regarding the normal symbol variation display is When established (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41), the demonstration display being executed may be continued without ending.

  (3-2) In addition, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the start condition regarding the normal symbol variation display is In response to the establishment (the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the demonstration display being executed may be terminated. In this case, the game state when the start condition relating to the normal symbol variation display is satisfied (when the game ball passes the passing gate 41) is (i) the low probability / non-KT state (that is, the left-handed operation should be performed) State), and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 even after the small hit game state is finished (that is, the game state is to be left-handed to continue) When a right-handed operation is performed), a left-handed notification may be performed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... LED control board 15 ... Relay board 17 ... Special variable winning ball apparatus 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Game control means having specific identification information variable display means capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information and variable display of the second specific identification information in parallel;
Production having decoration identification information variable display means capable of performing variable display of decoration identification information corresponding to one of variable display of first specific identification information and variable display of second specific identification information according to the gaming state Control means,
The gaming control means can transmit first information relating to variable display of the first specific identification information, second information relating to variable display of the second specific identification information, and gaming state information relating to the gaming state to the effect control means. And
When the production control means is restored from a power interruption, it can execute the restoration notification in a different manner depending on the first information, the second information, and the gaming state information. Gaming machine.

Images